User's Guide X548DE X548 User V16012509 En

User Manual: X548DE

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 296

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

X548 Series
User's Guide

October 2014
Machine type(s):
7525
Model(s):
630, 636

www.lexmark.com

Contents

Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................7
Learning about the printer...........................................................................9
Finding information about the printer......................................................................................................9
Selecting a location for the printer..........................................................................................................10
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................12
Basic functions of the scanner.................................................................................................................12
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass..............................................................................................13
Understanding the printer control panel................................................................................................14

Understanding the home screen................................................................16
Understanding the home screen.............................................................................................................16
Using the touch-screen buttons..............................................................................................................17

Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................21
Finding the IP address of the printer.......................................................................................................21
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................21
Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................22
Setting up Remote Operator Panel.........................................................................................................23
Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server...........................................24

Additional printer setup.............................................................................25
Installing internal options........................................................................................................................25
Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................33
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................35
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................37
Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................37
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network........................................................................38

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact........................................39
Saving paper and toner...........................................................................................................................39
Saving energy..........................................................................................................................................40
Recycling..................................................................................................................................................42

Contents

Loading paper and specialty media............................................................44
Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................44
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................44
Loading the standard 250‑sheet tray and optional 550‑sheet tray.........................................................44
Loading the 650‑sheet duo drawer.........................................................................................................47
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................48
Loading the manual feeder.....................................................................................................................50
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................52

Paper and specialty media guide................................................................54
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................54
Storing paper...........................................................................................................................................57
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................57

Printing......................................................................................................60
Printing a document................................................................................................................................60
Printing from a flash drive.......................................................................................................................61
Printing on specialty media.....................................................................................................................63
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................66
Printing photos from a PictBridge‑enabled digital camera.....................................................................68
Printing information pages......................................................................................................................68
Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................69

Copying......................................................................................................70
Making copies.........................................................................................................................................70
Copying film photos................................................................................................................................71
Copying on specialty media.....................................................................................................................71
Customizing copy settings.......................................................................................................................72
Placing information on copies.................................................................................................................77
Canceling a copy job................................................................................................................................77
Understanding the copy screens and options.........................................................................................78

E-mailing....................................................................................................81
Getting ready to e-mail...........................................................................................................................81
Creating an e-mail shortcut.....................................................................................................................82
E-mailing a document..............................................................................................................................83
Customizing e-mail settings.....................................................................................................................84

Contents

Canceling an e-mail.................................................................................................................................84
Understanding the e-mail options..........................................................................................................85

Faxing........................................................................................................88
Getting the printer ready to fax..............................................................................................................88
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................102
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................103
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................105
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................106
Understanding the fax options..............................................................................................................107
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................109

Scanning...................................................................................................111
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................111
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................112
Scanning to a computer or flash drive..................................................................................................113
Understanding the scan profile options................................................................................................115

Understanding the printer menus............................................................118
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................118
Supplies menu.......................................................................................................................................119
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................120
Reports menu........................................................................................................................................130
Network/Ports.......................................................................................................................................131
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................138
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................143
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................191

Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory......................193
Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................193
Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................194
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................194
Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................194
Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................195

Maintaining the printer............................................................................197
Cleaning the exterior of the printer......................................................................................................197
Cleaning the scanner glass....................................................................................................................197

Contents

Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................198
Checking the status of supplies.............................................................................................................198
Ordering supplies..................................................................................................................................199
Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................200
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................217

Administrative support............................................................................219
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................219
Using the Embedded Web Server.........................................................................................................219
Checking the printer status...................................................................................................................219
Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................219
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................220
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................220
Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................220

Clearing jams............................................................................................222
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................222
Understanding jam numbers and locations..........................................................................................222
200 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................224
201 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................224
202 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................225
230 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................227
235 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................227
24x paper jam........................................................................................................................................228
250 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................229
290–294 paper jams..............................................................................................................................230

Troubleshooting.......................................................................................231
Solving basic printer problems..............................................................................................................231
Understanding the printer messages....................................................................................................231
Solving printing problems.....................................................................................................................243
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................246
Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................249
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................251
Solving home screen application problems...........................................................................................255
Solving option problems........................................................................................................................256
Solving paper feed problems.................................................................................................................257

Contents

Solving print quality problems..............................................................................................................258
Solving color quality problems..............................................................................................................268
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................271
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................271

Notices.....................................................................................................272
Product information..............................................................................................................................272
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................272
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................277

Index........................................................................................................288

Safety information

Safety information
Connect the power cord directly to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or other types of surge or UPS devices. The power rating capacity of these types of
accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance, property
damage, or potential fire.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:

• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce risk of fire, use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided
with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public
switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.

Safety information

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug
the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Learning about the printer

Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for?

Find it here

Initial setup instructions:

Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.

• Connecting the printer
• Installing the printer software
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
Loading paper
Configuring printer settings

User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are
available at http://support.lexmark.com.
Note: These guides are also available in other
languages.

Viewing and printing documents and photos
Setting up and using the printer software
Configuring the printer on a network
Caring for and maintaining the printer
Troubleshooting and solving problems

Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility
features of your printer

Lexmark Accessibility Guide—This guide is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.

Help using the printer software

Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.
Click

to view context‑sensitive information.

Notes:

• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.

• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.

Learning about the printer

What are you looking for?

Find it here

The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:

Lexmark support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com

•
•
•
•
•

Documentation
Driver downloads
Live chat support
E‑mail support
Voice support

Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
printer.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:

•
•
•
•
Warranty information

Machine Type number
Serial number
Date purchased
Store where purchased

Warranty information varies by country or region:

• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.

• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with this printer.

Selecting a location for the printer
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then also leave enough room for them. It is important to:

• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.

• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators
– Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations
– Clean, dry, and free of dust
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

Learning about the printer

32.07 kg
(70.71 lb)

4
3

102 mm (4 in.)

508 mm (20 in.)

152 mm (6 in.)

76 mm (3 in.)

254 mm (10 in.)

Learning about the printer

Printer configurations
Basic models
3
3
2

1
1
4
4

1
4

5
5

5
7

6
8

6
9

Printer control panel

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Standard exit bin

Top door latch

Right side cover

Standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1)

Manual feeder

650-sheet duo drawer with integrated multipurpose feeder (Tray 2)

Optional 550-sheet tray (Tray 3)

Basic functions of the scanner
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for workgroups. You can:

•
•
•
•

Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.
Send a fax using the printer control panel.
Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, an FTP server, or a USB flash memory device.

Learning about the printer

Understanding the ADF and scanner glass
Scanner glass

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.

You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.

Using the ADF
The ADF can scan multiple pages including duplex (two‑sided) pages. When using the ADF:
Note: Duplex scanning is not available on selected printer models.

•
•
•
•
•

Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.
Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF.
Scan sizes from 125 x 216 mm (4.9 x 8.5 in.) wide to 127 x 356 mm (5 x 14 in.) long.
Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14 to 32 lb).
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Using the scanner glass
The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:

• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
• Scan or copy documents up to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
• Copy books up to 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) thick.

Learning about the printer

Understanding the printer control panel
1

2
1 @!.

2 ABC

4 GHI

5 JKL

3 DEF
6 MNO

7 PQRS

8 TUV

9 WXYZ

4
5
6
7
10

Item

Description

Display

View scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages.

Keypad

Enter numbers, letters, or symbols on the display.

1 @!.

2 ABC

4 GHI

5 JKL

6 MNO

7 PQRS

8 TUV

9 WXYZ

Pause

3 DEF

• Press

to cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number. In the Fax To field, a Pause
is represented by a comma (,).

• From the home screen, press to redial a fax number.
• The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions. When outside of the Fax
menu, fax function, or home screen, pressing
4

Back

causes an error beep.

In the Copy menu, press
to delete the right-most digit of the value in the Copy Count. The default
numerous times.
value of 1 appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing
to delete the right-most digit of a number entered manually.
In the Fax Destination List, press
to delete an entire shortcut entry. Once an entire line is deleted, another press
You can also press
of
causes the cursor to move up one line.
In the E-mail Destination List, press to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If the character
is in a shortcut, then the shortcut is deleted.

USB port

Insert a flash drive to send data to the printer or to scan a file to the flash drive.

Home

Press

Submit

to return to the home screen.

• Press
to initiate the current job indicated on the display.
• From the home screen, press
to start a copy job with the default settings.
• If pressed while a job is scanning, then the button has no effect.

Learning about the printer

Item
8

Description
Indicator light

Stop

•
•
•
•

Off—The printer is off.
Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red—Operator intervention is needed.

Press

to stop all printer activity.

A list of options is offered once Stopped appears on the display.

Sleep

Press to put printer into or out of Sleep Mode.

Understanding the home screen

Understanding the home screen
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

Touch

Copy

Access the Copy menus and make copies.

E-mail

Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.

Fax

Access the Fax menus and send fax.
Access the printer menus.
Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.

FTP

Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.

Status message bar

• Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.

Status/Supplies

• Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue
processing.

• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
USB or USB Thumbdrive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This button appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or
flash drive is connected to the printer.
Bookmarks

Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any
other application.

Held Jobs

Display all current held jobs.

Understanding the home screen

Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:
Touch

Search held jobs

Search on any of the following items:

•
•
•
•
•
Release Held Fax

User name for held or confidential print jobs
Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
Profile names
Bookmark container or print job names
USB container or print job names for supported file types

Access the list of held faxes.
Note: This button appears only when there are held faxes with a
scheduled hold time previously set.

Lock Device

Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to lock the
printer control panel.
Note: This button appears only when the printer is unlocked and
password has been set.

Unlock Device

Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to unlock
the printer control panel.
Note: This button appears only when the printer is locked. The
printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while
this appears.

Cancel Jobs

Open the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three
headings: Print, Fax, and Network.
The following options are available under the Print, Fax, and Network
headings:

•
•
•
•
•

Print job
Copy job
Fax profile
FTP
E-mail send

Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can
show only three jobs per screen. If more than three jobs exist in a
column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Change Language

Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that allows you to change
the primary language of the printer.

Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings and
administrative setup.

Understanding the home screen

Sample touch screen

Touch

Submit

Submit changes made in the printer settings.

Sample Copy

Print a sample copy.

Right arrow

Scroll to the right.

Left arrow

Scroll to the left.

Home

Return to the home screen.

Right increase Select a higher value.

Left decrease Select a lower value.

Exit

Exit from the current screen.

Understanding the home screen

Touch

Tips

Open a context-sensitive Help dialog on the touch screen.

Other touch-screen buttons
Touch

Save a setting.

Cancel

• Cancel an action or a selection.
• Exit a screen and lets you return to the previous screen without saving changes.

Reset

Reset values on the screen.

Radio button

Select or clear an item.

Features
Feature

Description

Menu trail line:

A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the
path taken to arrive at the current menu.

Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies

Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch an
underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is
set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.

Attendance message alert

If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.

Understanding the home screen

Feature

Description

Warning

If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Setting up and using the home screen applications
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:

• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.

1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3 Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

Showing or hiding icons on the home screen
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
A list of basic printer functions appears.

2 Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen.
Cleared check box items are hidden.

3 Click Submit.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Activating the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. You can activate and set up these applications using
the Embedded Web Server. To access the Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on
page 21.
For detailed information about configuring and using the home screen applications, go to the Lexmark support Web
site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Setting up Forms and Favorites
Icon

Description
The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print
frequently used online forms directly from the home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Forms and Favorites.
3 Define the bookmarks, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.

Setting up Scan to Network
Icon

Description
The application lets you capture a digital image of a hard‑copy document and route it to a shared network
folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations.
Notes:

• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.

• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.

2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Scan to Network.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.

Setting up My MFP
Icon

Description
The application lets you customize your touch‑screen settings and store those preferences in a flash
drive. Each time you want to copy, fax, or scan, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer. All
your personal preferences are automatically uploaded, including job settings, home screen preferences,
and address book.
Note: The icon appears only when a flash drive with My MFP settings is inserted into the USB port of
the printer.

To set up My MFP, insert a flash drive into the USB port of the printer, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display to run the setup wizard.
To use My MFP, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer when you want to copy, fax, or scan.

Understanding WS‑Scan
Icon

Description
The Web Services‑Scan application lets you scan documents at the network printer, and then send the
scanned image to your computer. WS‑Scan is a Microsoft application that is similar to Scan to Network,
but has the capability of sending the scanned image to a Windows‑based application. To learn more
about WS‑Scan, see the Microsoft documentation.
Note: The icon appears on the printer home screen only when there is a computer registered with the
network printer. The computer must have either Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista operating
system installed.

Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing
at the network printer.

2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Remote Operator Panel.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

3 Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, from the Embedded Web Server, click Applications > Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC
Applet.

Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded
Web Server
You can export configuration settings into a text file that can then be imported and used to apply the settings to one
or more additional printers.

Exporting a configuration
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings or Configuration.
2 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
3 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
4 Click Configure > Export.
5 Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file, and then enter a unique file name or
use the default name.
Note: If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs, then repeat the export until the configuration file is saved.

Importing a configuration
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings or Configuration.
2 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
3 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
4 Click Configure > Import.
5 Browse to the saved configuration file, and then load or preview it.
Note: If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the browser, and then click Apply.

Additional printer setup

Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards. Some options are applicable
only in some printer models.

Using the security lock feature
The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached,
the printer is locked. Once locked, the metal plate and the system board cannot be removed. Attach a security lock to
the printer in the location shown.

Additional printer setup

Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

1 Access the system board at the back of the printer.
a Turn the screws on the cover counterclockwise to remove them.
b Remove the cover.

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

2 Use the following illustration to locate the connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

Additional printer setup

Flash memory or font card connector

Memory card connector

Additional printer setup

3 Open the memory card connector latches.

4 Unpack the memory card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

5 Align the notches on the memory card with the ridges on the connector.

Notches

Ridges

6 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it snaps into place.
7 Reinstall the system board cover.

Additional printer setup

Installing a flash memory or font card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

1 Access the system board at the back of the printer.
a Turn the screws on the cover counterclockwise to remove them.
b Remove the cover .

Additional printer setup

Flash memory or font card connector

Memory card connector

3 Unpack the flash memory or font card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

Additional printer setup

4 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.
1

Plastic pins

Metal pins

5 Push the card firmly into place.

Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.

6 Reinstall the system board cover.

Additional printer setup

Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb), and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.

• Optional 550‑sheet tray (Tray 3)
• 650‑sheet duo drawer (Tray 2)
• Printer
For more information on installing an optional 550‑sheet tray, see the setup documentation that came with the option.

Installing an optional tray or drawer
The printer supports two additional input sources: an optional 550‑sheet tray and a 650‑sheet duo drawer (Tray 2) with
an integrated multipurpose feeder.
Note: Some printer models may not support the optional 550‑sheet tray.

Additional printer setup

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.

1 Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material and the dust cover.
2 Place the tray near the printer.
Note: If you are installing both the optional tray and the 650‑sheet duo drawer, then the optional 550‑sheet tray
must always be installed as the first tray (configuring from the bottom up).

3 Align the 650‑sheet duo drawer with the optional 550‑sheet tray, and then lower it into place.

Additional printer setup

4 Align the printer with the 650‑sheet duo drawer, lower the printer into place, and then install the dust covers.

Note: Once the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in
the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available options in the
print driver” on page 37.

Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.
Be sure to match the following:

• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port

Additional printer setup

3
4

5
6
7

Security lock port

Printer power cord socket

Printer fax LINE port

Printer fax EXT port

Ethernet port

USB printer port

USB port
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown
while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.

Additional printer setup

Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:

• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option, and then install it again.

• Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then print a
network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids
network printing configuration.

Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page

Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page

2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
2 Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3 For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.

Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.

Additional printer setup

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
b Type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Select the printer you want to update, and then do either of the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
3 Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4 Apply the changes.

For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2 Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3 Apply the changes.

Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.

•
•
•
•

A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
The network gateway
The network mask
A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.

You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:

• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco‑Mode” on
page 40.

Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled
paper and other office papers” on page 55.

Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports two‑sided printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of
the paper.
Notes:

• Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
• For a complete list of supported products and countries, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
setting multiple page printing (N‑Up) for the print job.

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact

Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:

• Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 222.

Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

Off

Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. This setting supports the performance
specifications of your printer.

Energy

Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.

• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first
page is printed.

• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
• When the printer enters Sleep mode, the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin lights
are turned off.

• If scanning is supported, the scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode.
Paper

• Enable the automatic duplex feature.
• Turn off print log features.

Reducing printer noise
To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact

Choose

Off

Use factory default settings. This setting supports the
performance specifications of your printer.

Note: Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed
printing.
On

Reduce printer noise.

• Print jobs will process at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document is
ready to print. There will be a short delay before the first
page is printed.

• If your printer has faxing capability, fax sounds are
reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax
speaker and ringer. The fax is placed in standby mode.

• The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned
off.

• The printer will ignore the Advance Start command.

Adjusting Sleep mode
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode

2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3 Apply the changes.

Adjusting the brightness of the display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading your display, then adjust the brightness of the display.
Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact

Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings

2 Touch the arrows until Screen Brightness appears, and then select a setting.
3 Touch Submit.

Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:

• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.

Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact

To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Loading paper and specialty media

Loading paper and specialty media
Setting the paper size and type
The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu. The Paper Type
setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit

Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:

• Units of Measure
• Portrait Width
• Portrait Height
Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.); the largest size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure

2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height > select the width or height > Submit.

Loading the standard 250‑sheet tray and optional 550‑sheet
tray
The printer has one standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) with an attached manual feeder. The 250-sheet tray, the 650sheet duo drawer, and the optional 550-sheet tray support the same paper sizes and types and are loaded in the same
way.
Note: Some printer models may not support the optional 550‑sheet tray.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.

1 Pull the tray out.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job is printing or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a
jam.

Loading paper and specialty media

2 Squeeze the length guide tab, and then slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded.

Note: Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guide.

Loading paper and specialty media

3 If the paper is longer than letter‑size paper, then push the green tab at the back of the tray to extend it.

4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.

5 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup.

6 Make sure the paper guides are secure against the edges of the paper.
Note: Make sure the side guides are placed tightly against the edges of the paper so that the image is registered
properly on the page.

Loading paper and specialty media

7 Insert the tray.

8 If a different type or size of paper was loaded than the type or size previously loaded in the tray, then change the
Paper Type or Paper Size setting for the tray from the printer control panel.
Note: Mixing paper sizes or types in a paper tray may cause jams.

Loading the 650‑sheet duo drawer
The 650‑sheet duo drawer (Tray 2) consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated 100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The
drawer is loaded in the same way as the 250‑sheet tray and the optional 550‑sheet tray, and supports the same paper
types and sizes. The only differences are the look of the guide tabs and the location of the paper size indicators.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
1
2

Length guide tabs

Size indicators

Width guide tabs

Loading paper and specialty media

Loading the multipurpose feeder
1 Push the multipurpose feeder latch to the left.

2 Open the multipurpose feeder.

3 Grasp the extension, and pull it straight out until it is fully extended.

4 Prepare the paper for loading.
• Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.

• Hold transparencies by the edges. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the print side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.

Loading paper and specialty media

• Flex a stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.

5 Locate the stack height limiter and tab.
Note: Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter.
2
1

4
3

Tab

Stack height limiter

Width guide

Size indicators

Loading paper and specialty media

6 Load the paper, and then adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack.
• Load paper, card stock, and transparencies with the recommended print side facedown and the top edge
entering first.

• Load envelopes with the flap side up.
Notes:

• Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
• Load only one size and type of paper at a time.
7 Make sure the paper is as far into the multipurpose feeder as it will go with very gentle pushing. Paper should lie
flat in the multipurpose feeder. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder and is not bent or
wrinkled.

8 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.

Loading the manual feeder
The standard 250‑sheet tray has an integrated manual feeder that can be used to print on different types of media one
sheet at a time.

1 Send a manual print job.

For Windows users
a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Navigate to:
Paper tab > Paper type > Manual Paper > OK > OK

For Macintosh users
a With a document open, choose File > Print.
b From the Copies & Pages or General pop-up menu, choose Manual Paper.
c Click OK or Print.

Loading paper and specialty media

2 When Load Single Sheet Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] appears, load the sheet
facedown into the manual feeder. Load envelopes on the left side of the feeder with the flap side up.

Note: Align the long edge of the sheet so that it is flush with the right side of the manual feeder.

3 Adjust the width guides until they lightly touch the sheet. Do not force the width guides against the sheet. Doing
so may damage the sheet.

4 Push the sheet in until it stops. The printer pulls it in farther.
Note: To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high‑quality media designed for laser printers.

Loading paper and specialty media

Linking and unlinking trays
Linking trays
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next
linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked.
The Paper Size setting for all trays must be set manually from the Paper Size menu. The Paper Type setting must be set
for all trays from the Paper Type menu. The Paper Type menu and the Paper Size menu are both available from the
Paper Size/Type menu.

Unlinking trays
Change one of the following tray settings:

• Paper Type
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked
trays, then assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type [x], or define your own custom
name.

• Paper Size
Paper Size settings must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.
Note: Trays that do not have the same settings as any other tray are not linked.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper
loaded in a tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Prints may not be
properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.

Creating a custom name for a paper type
If the printer is on a network, you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x] for
each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Name > type a name > Submit.
Note: This custom name will replace the Custom Type [x] name under the Custom Types and Paper Size and
Type menus.

3 Click Custom Types > select a paper type > Submit.

Assigning a custom paper type name
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a custom paper type name > select a tray > Submit

Loading paper and specialty media

Configuring a custom name
If the printer is on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x]
for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types > select the custom name you want to configure > select a paper or
specialty media type > Submit.

Paper and specialty media guide

Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:

• Make sure that the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or on the printer control
panel.

• Flex and straighten specialty media before loading them.
• The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
• For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark support Web
site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating
new paper stock.

Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than
75 g/m2 (20 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 80 g/m2 (21 lb
bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m2 or heavier paper.

Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.

Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;
however, smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Paper and specialty media guide

Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb bond) paper, use grain long fibers.

Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton possesses characteristics that can negatively affect paper handling.

Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:

• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that
represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor
and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves
through the printer)

• Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control
over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner,
they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates
more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource
management overall.

Paper and specialty media guide

Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To
gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of
life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions
caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive
manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is
one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help
customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers
who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is maintained.
However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:

1 Minimize paper consumption.
2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications
guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and
socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.

3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight paper,
or recycled paper.

Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:

•
•
•
•

Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers

•
•
•
•
•

Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers

Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software
application to successfully print on these forms.)
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
Multiple part forms or documents

For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found
at the Environmental Sustainability link.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
•
•
•
•

Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper.
Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these
requirements; latex inks might not.

Paper and specialty media guide

• Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This
determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality.

• When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.

Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:

• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.

•
•
•
•

Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
Store individual packages on a flat surface.
Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes, types, and weights of
paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.

Supported paper sizes
Notes:

• Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo drawer, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo drawer supports the same paper sizes
as the optional 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and
weights.

• Some printer models may not support the optional 550-sheet tray.
Paper size

Dimensions

210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)

148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.3 in.)

JIS B5

182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)

105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)

250‑sheet tray Optional
550‑sheet tray

Multipurpose
feeder

Manual
feeder

* When Universal is selected, the page is formatted for 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software

program.

Paper and specialty media guide

Paper size

Dimensions

250‑sheet tray Optional
550‑sheet tray

Statement

140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Letter

216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)

Folio

216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)

Oficio (Mexico)

216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)

Legal

216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)

Executive

184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)

Universal*

148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.) up to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) X
up to 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)

7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)

98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)

9 Envelope

98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)

10 Envelope

105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)

DL Envelope

110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)

B5 Envelope

176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)

C5 Envelope

162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9 in.)

Monarch

105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)

Other Envelope

98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.3 in.) up to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)

Multipurpose
feeder

Manual
feeder

* When Universal is selected, the page is formatted for 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software

program.

Paper and specialty media guide

Supported paper types and weights
Notes:

• Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo drawer, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo drawer supports the same paper as
the optional 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and
weights.

• Some printer models may not support the optional 550-sheet tray.
Paper type

Standard 250‑sheet
tray

Optional 550‑sheet
tray

Multipurpose feeder Manual feeder

Paper

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Plain1, 2
Bond1, 2
Glossy
Colored
Custom Type [x]
Letterhead
Light1, 2
Heavy1, 2
Preprinted
Rough/Cotton1,2
Recycled

Card stock1, 2, 3
Transparencies

Labels2, 4, 5

• Paper
Envelopes2, 6, 7
1

Paper types must be set to match the supported paper weights.

The duplex unit supports paper weights from 60 to 105 g/m2 (16–28‑lb) grain long bond paper. The duplex unit does not
support card stock, transparencies, envelopes, or labels.

For 60 to 176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) bond paper, we recommend grain long fibers.

The pressure‑sensitive area must enter the printer first.

Single-sided paper labels designed for laser printers are supported for occasional use. The use of paper labels should not
exceed 20 pages per month. Prolonged use may reduce fuser life. Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual-sided labels are not supported.
For more information, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
6

The maximum weight for 100 percent cotton envelopes is 90 g/m2 (24‑lb) bond.

The cotton content limit for 105 g/m2 (28‑lb) bond envelopes is 25 percent.

Printing

Printing
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 222 and “Storing paper” on page 57.

Printing a document
Printing a document
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.
2 Send the print job:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust settings as necessary.
d Click OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings as needed.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.

Adjusting toner darkness
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness setting.
4 Click Submit.

Printing

Printing from a mobile device
For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit
http://lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.

Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:

• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, enter the file password from the printer control panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

Notes:

• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.

• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these
print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory
device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A
loss of data can occur.

Printing

2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to increase the number of copies to print, and then touch Print.
Notes:

• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print
files from the flash drive as held jobs.

Supported flash drives and file types
Flash drive

• Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
• SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
Notes:

• Hi‑Speed USB flash drives must support the Full‑Speed standard. Devices supporting only USB
low‑speed capabilities are not supported.

• USB flash drives must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS
(New Technology File System) or any other file system are not supported.

File type
Documents:

• .pdf
• .xps
Images:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

.dcx
.gif
.JPEG
.jpg
.bmp
.pcx
.TIFF
.tif
.png

Printing

Printing on specialty media
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before
buying large quantities.
When printing on card stock:

• From MarkVision Professional, the printer software, or the printer control panel:
1 Set the Paper Type to Card Stock.
2 Set the Paper Weight to Card Stock Weight.
3 Set the Card Stock Weight to Normal or Heavy.
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or
other paper handling problems.

• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F)
without releasing hazardous emissions.

• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting
introduces semi‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.

• Use grain short card stock when possible.

Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on envelopes:

• Feed envelopes from the manual feeder or optional multipurpose feeder.
• Set the Paper Type to Envelope, and select the envelope size.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the
envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or
releasing hazardous emissions.

• For the best performance, use envelopes made from 60 g/m2 (16 lb bond) paper. Use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond)
weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. All‑cotton envelopes must not exceed 90 g/m2
(24 lb bond) weight.

• Use only new envelopes.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position

Printing

– Have bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using letterhead
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following table to determine which direction to
load the letterhead:
Source or process

• Standard 250‑sheet tray
• Optional 550‑sheet tray
• Simplex (one‑sided) printing

Print side and paper orientation
Printed letterhead design is placed faceup. The top edge of the sheet with the logo is
placed at the front of the tray.

from trays

Printed letterhead design is placed facedown. The top edge of the sheet with the logo
is placed at the back of the tray.

Duplex (two‑sided) printing from
trays

Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for
laser printers.

Printing

Source or process

Print side and paper orientation

Manual feeder (simplex printing)
Multipurpose feeder

Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown. The top edge of the sheet with the
logo should enter the manual feeder first.

Manual feeder (duplex printing)
Multipurpose feeder

Preprinted letterhead design is placed faceup. The top edge of the sheet with the logo
should enter the manual feeder last.

Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for
laser printers.

Tips on using labels
Note: Use paper label sheets for occasional use only. Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual‑sided labels are not supported.
For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on
the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
When printing on labels:

• Use labels designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Note: Labels can be printed at a higher fusing temperature up to 220°C (428°F) if Label Weight is set to
Heavy. Select this setting using the Embedded Web Server, or from the printer control panel Paper menu.

– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without
delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.

• Do not use labels with slick backing material.

Printing

• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.

• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of the label.
• Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.

• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge, and
use a non‑oozing adhesive.

• Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.

Tips on using transparencies
Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on transparencies:

• Feed transparencies from the 250-sheet tray, manual feeder, or optional multipurpose feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure
transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or
releasing hazardous emissions.

• To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.

Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control
panel.
All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Print job type

Description

Confidential

Confidential lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from
the control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.

Verify

Verify lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining
copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is
automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed.

Reserve

Reserve allows the printer to store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print
jobs are held until deleted from the Help Jobs menu.

Repeat

Repeat prints and stores print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.

Printing

Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them.

For Windows users
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.

5 Click OK or Print.
6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter PIN > select print job > specify number of copies >
Print

• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > select print job > specify number of copies > Print

For Macintosh users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.

4 Click OK or Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter PIN > select print job > specify number of copies >
Print

• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > select print job > specify number of copies > Print

Printing

Printing photos from a PictBridge‑enabled digital camera
You can connect a PictBridge‑enabled digital camera to the printer, and use the buttons on the camera to select and
print photos.

1 Insert one end of the USB cable into the camera.
Note: Use only the USB cable that came with your camera.

2 Insert the other end of the USB cable into the USB port on the front of the printer.

Notes:

• Make sure the PictBridge‑enabled digital camera is set to the correct USB mode. See the camera
documentation for more information.

• If the PictBridge connection is successful, then a confirmation message appears on the printer display.
3 Follow the instructions on the camera to select and print photos.
Note: If the printer is turned off while the camera is connected, then you must disconnect and then reconnect the
camera.

Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.

Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:

Printing

> Reports > Print Directory

Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press

on the keypad.

2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press

on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.

Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
2 From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.

For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2 From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.

Copying

Copying
Scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, touch Copy It.

Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It

Copying

Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It

3 If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Next
Page.

4 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.

Copying film photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >

> Photo/Film >

> Copy It > Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job

Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document >

4 Touch Copy to, and then select the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Manual Feeder Size.
5 Load transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.
6 From the home screen, navigate to:
> select the desired size of the transparencies > Manual Feeder Type >

> Copy It

Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to > Manual Feeder

Copying

4 Place the letterhead faceup, top edge first in the multipurpose feeder.
5 Select the size of the letterhead.
6 Navigate to:
Continue > Letterhead > Continue > Copy It

Customizing copy settings
Copying in black and white
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Allow color copies > Off >

> Submit

Copying to a different size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from > select the size of the original document >
5 Touch Copy to > select the size of the copy >

6 Touch Copy It.

Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to

Copying

4 Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use.
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will also need to select the paper size and type.

5 Touch Copy It.

Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).

Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >

> Copy to > Auto Size Match >

> Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.

Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >

> Copy to > Letter >

> Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.

Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.

Copying

4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button for your preferred duplexing method.
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy. For
example, select 1‑sided to 2‑sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2‑sided copies.

5 Touch

, and then Copy It.

Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be
scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
To reduce or enlarge a copy:

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.

5 Touch Copy It.

Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content

4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying:
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.

• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
5 Touch

6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying:
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.

Copying

•
•
•
•
•

Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

7 Touch

> Copy It.

Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated

Not collated

By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off:

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > Off >

> Copy It

Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Collate must be set to On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is set to Off,
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job.

4 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs

Copying

• Between Pages
• Off
5 Touch

> Copy It.

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:

• The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• The Copy Size must be set to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select desired output >

> Copy It

Creating a custom copy job (job build)
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with the
same or different parameters.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:

• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
For example:

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Options > Custom Job > On > Done > Copy It
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.

Copying

4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.
Note: If required, change the job settings.

5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.

Placing information on copies
Placing the date and time at the top of each page
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer

4 Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time.
5 Touch Yes or No >

> Copy It.

Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom or Draft.
To place a message on the copies:

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message >

4 Touch Copy It.

Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel Job
on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.

Copying

Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.

Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press

on the keypad.

2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press

on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.

Understanding the copy screens and options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size of the original document.

• Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
• When “Copy from” is set to Mixed Sizes, the scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies
are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.

Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.

• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the paper size setting for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the
Scale setting to accommodate the difference.

Copies
This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed.

Scale
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale can
also be set for you automatically.

• When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, setting the
“Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information
on your copy.

• Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.
• Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.
• Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.

Copying

Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex) of
two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided copies
(simplex) from two-sided original documents.

Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The
factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you
want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(3,3,3).

Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.

• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.

• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.

Save As Shortcut
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number.

Copying

Using the advanced options
These options, among other things, allow you to customize the advanced imaging settings, combine multiple jobs into
one, and clean the edges of the document.

E-mailing

E-mailing
Scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e‑mail
from the printer. You can type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.

Getting ready to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4 Click E-mail Settings > Setup E-mail Server.
5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
6 Click Submit.

Configuring e‑mail settings
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

E-mailing

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
4 Click Submit.

Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).

5 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
6 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.

2 Touch

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

E-mailing

E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the
proper size may result to a cropped image.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient

4 Enter the e‑mail address, or press

and then enter the shortcut number.

To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
Note: You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.

5 Touch Done > Send It.

Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press

, enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch

To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.

4 Touch Send It.

Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail >Recipient(s) >

> enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts

E-mailing

4 Touch the name of the recipients.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add, or search the address book.

5 Touch Done.

Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Type an e‑mail address.
5 Touch Options > Subject.
6 Type the e-mail subject.
7 Touch Done > Message.
8 Type an e-mail message.
9 Touch Done > E-mail It.

Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as

3 Select the file type you want to send.
Note: If you select Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.

4 Touch

> Send It.

Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.

E-mailing

Understanding the e-mail options
Recipients
This option lets you enter the destination of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.

Subject
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail.

Message
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.

File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.

Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.

• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e‑mail screen appears with the new
setting displayed.

• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.

Resolution
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.

Color
This option sets the output color for the scanned image. Touch to enable or disable color.

Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.

• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.

E-mailing

Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.

Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:

• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages. This can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

•
•
•
•

JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
RTF—Use this to create a file in editable format.
TXT—Use this to create an ASCII text file with no formatting.

Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.

• Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.

• Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match the
orientation.

• Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

E-mailing

Using the advanced options
These options, among other things, allow you to customize advanced imaging settings, combine multiple jobs into one,
and clean the edges of a document.

Faxing

Faxing
Scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

Getting the printer ready to fax
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Notes:

• The following connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.
• During the initial printer setup, clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up later,
and then touch Continue.

• The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.

Faxing

Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: station name (identification of the business, other
entity, or individual sending the message) and station number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business,
other entity, or individual).
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.

Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, a series of start‑up
screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the following screens appear:
Fax Name or Station Name
Fax Number or Station Number

1 When Fax Name or Station Name appears, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
2 After entering the Fax Name or Station Name, touch Submit.
3 When Fax Number or Station Number appears, enter the printer fax number.
4 After entering the Fax Number or Station Number, touch Submit.

Faxing

Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

Choosing a fax connection
You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem. To
determine the best way to set up the printer, see the following table.
Notes:

• The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall outlet. Other devices (such
as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as described in
the setup steps.

• If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is required.
Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can
interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly.

• You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line
to send and receive faxes.
Equipment and service options

Fax connection setup

Connect directly to the telephone line

See “Connecting to an analog telephone line” on page 91

Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL or ADSL)
service

See “Connecting to a DSL service” on page 91.

Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) system

See “Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system” on page 91.

Use a Distinctive Ring service

See “Connecting to a distinctive ring service” on page 92.

Connect to a telephone line, telephone, and answering See “Connecting the printer and a telephone or answering machine
to the same telephone line” on page 92
machine
Connect through an adapter used in your area

See “Connecting to an adapter for your country or region” on
page 95.

Connect to a computer with a modem

See “Connecting to a computer with a modem” on page 99.

Faxing

Connecting to an analog telephone line
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US‑style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the
equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

Connecting to a DSL service
If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then
follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.
Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.

3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.

Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system
If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.
Notes:

• Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.
• Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.
• When using a PBX system, make sure the call waiting tone is off.

Faxing

• When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.
• For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX
system.

Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have multiple
telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be
useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these
steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer:
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This allows the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.

a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Settings > Distinctive Rings

b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.

Connecting the printer and a telephone or answering machine to the same
telephone line
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack .

Faxing

3 Remove the plug from the printer EXT port

4 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the printer EXT port
Use one of the following methods:

Faxing

Answering machine

Answering machine and telephone

Telephone or a telephone with an integrated answering
machine

Faxing

Connecting to an adapter for your country or region
The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone
wall jack:
Country/region

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Austria
Cyprus
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Ireland

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

New Zealand
Netherlands
Norway
Portugal
Sweden
Switzerland
United Kingdom

Italy

Countries or regions except Austria, Germany, and Switzerland
For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an answering
machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
Note: There is a special RJ‑11 plug installed in the printer EXT port
. Do not remove this plug. It is necessary
for the proper operation of the fax function and connected telephones.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the active telephone
wall jack.
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your
location.

3 Connect the answering machine or telephone to the adapter.

Faxing

Use one of the following methods:
Answering machine

Telephone

Faxing

Austria, Germany, and Switzerland
There is a special RJ‑11 plug installed in the printer EXT port
operation of the fax function and connected telephones.

. Do not remove this plug. It is necessary for the proper

Connecting to a telephone wall jack in Germany
Note: There is a special RJ‑11 plug installed in the printer EXT port
. Do not remove this plug. It is necessary for
the proper operation of the fax function and connected telephones.

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter.
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your
location.

Faxing

3 Connect the adapter into the N slot of an active analog telephone wall jack.

Faxing

4 If you would like to use the same line for both fax and telephone communication, then connect a second telephone
line (not provided) between the telephone and the F slot of an active analog telephone wall jack.

5 If you would like to use the same line for recording messages on your answering machine, then connect a second
telephone cable (not provided) between the answering machine and the other N slot of the active analog telephone
wall jack.

Connecting to a computer with a modem
Connect the printer to a computer with a modem to send faxes from the software program.
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

Faxing

3 Remove the protective plug from the printer EXT port

4 Connect your telephone to the computer telephone jack.

100

Faxing

5 Connect an additional telephone cord (not provided) from the computer modem to the printer EXT port

101

Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may
have to reset the date and time.

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.

Faxing

102

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.

Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST checkbox, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time
Zone Setup section.

4 Click Submit.

Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send
a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a single
fax number or a group of fax numbers.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).

Faxing

103

4 Assign a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add.

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.

4 Navigate to:
> enter a name for the shortcut > Done > OK > Fax It

Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.
To add recipients, touch Next Number and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or
search the address book.
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press . The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax to”
box. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.

5 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the computer
The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works
as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.

1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

Faxing

104

3 Navigate to:
Fax tab > Enable fax

4 Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.
Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature

5 If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.
6 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
7 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the
appropriate information.

8 Click OK.
Notes:

• The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on
installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.

• The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it
can be used.

• If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent
automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.

Sending a fax using shortcuts
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. A shortcut number (1–99999) can
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press

, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.

4 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the address book
The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers.
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax >

> Browse shortcuts

Faxing

105

4 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.
Note: Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.

5 Touch Done > Fax It.

Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Super Fine (slowest speed but best quality).

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options

4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.
5 Touch Fax It.

Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options

4 From the Darkness area, touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax.
5 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

Faxing

106

3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Advanced Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission
are listed in the Fax Queue.

4 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is
unavailable.

5 Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.

Viewing a fax log
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

Blocking junk faxes
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to
block.

Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.

Faxing

107

Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.

2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.

3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.

Understanding the fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select from the following values:

• Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
• Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
• Super Fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.

Faxing

108

Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.

Color
This option enables or disables color in faxing.

Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.

• Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.

• Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match the
orientation.

• Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Delayed Send
This lets you send a fax at a later time or date.

1 Set up your fax.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Delayed Send > enter the date and time you want to send your fax > Done
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, then the fax is sent the next time the
printer is turned on.
This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain
hours, or when transmission times are cheaper.

Using the advanced options
These options, among other things, allow you to customize advanced imaging settings, combine multiple jobs into one,
and clean the edges of a document.

Faxing

109

Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3 In the Print Faxes Password field, enter a password.
4 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
5 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
6 Click Add.

Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:
• Print
• Print and Forward
• Forward

Faxing

4 From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:
• Fax
• E‑mail
• FTP
• LDSS
• eSF
5 In the Forward to Shortcut field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.

6 Click Submit.

110

Scanning

111

Scanning
Scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be
sent to the server at a time.
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be
another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned, and then sent to a color printer. Sending a
document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax. The difference is that you are sending the information over your
network instead of over the phone line.

Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to
an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for
creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer touch screen.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

Scanning

112

3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.

4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.
5 Enter the appropriate information.
6 Enter a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

7 Click Add.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > type the FTP address >

> enter a name for the shortcut > Done

2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then
touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

3 Touch Submit.

Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Send It

Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press

, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.

4 Touch Send It.

Scanning

113

Scanning to an FTP address using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP >

> enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts > name of recipient > Search

Scanning to a computer or flash drive
Scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or to a flash drive. The computer does not have to be
directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer
over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer, and then downloading the profile to the printer.

Scanning to a computer
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Scan Profile > Create.
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.

Scanning

114

5 Enter a scan name.
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.

6 Click Submit.
7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number when
you are ready to scan your documents.

a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

b If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
c Press

# , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and
then touch Profiles.

d After entering the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program
you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.

8 Return to the computer to view the file.
The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.

Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
The USB Drive home screen appears.

4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
5 Adjust the scan settings.
6 Touch Scan It.

Using the ScanBack Utility
You can use the LexmarkTM ScanBackTM Utility to create scan‑to‑PC profiles. The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded
from the Lexmark Web site on http://support.lexmark.com.

1 Set up a scan‑to‑PC profile:
a Launch the ScanBack Utility.
b Select the printer.
If no printers are listed, then contact your system support person, or click Setup to manually search for an IP
address or host name.

c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind
of output you want to create.

Scanning

115

d Select any of the following:
• Show MFP Instructions—View or print the instructions.
• Create Shortcut—Save this group of settings to use again.
e Click Finish.
A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.

2 Scan original documents:
a Load all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
b From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Scan/Email > Profiles > select your scan profile > Submit
Note: The output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.

Understanding the scan profile options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: Addresses should be in dot notation form (for example: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy).

File Name
This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document.

Original Size
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan
an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).

Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:

• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages. The PDF can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF
saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

•
•
•
•

JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
RTF—Use to create a file in editable format.
TXT—Use to create ASCII text file with no formatting.

Scanning

116

Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.

Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.

Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.

Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.

• Sides (Duplex)— Use this to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on
both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.

• Orientation— Use this to specify the orientation of the original document, and then change Sides and Binding to
match the orientation.

• Binding— Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge of the page.

Scanning

117

Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Using the advanced options
These options, among other things, allow you to customize the advanced imaging settings, combine multiple jobs into
one, and clean the edges of the document.

Understanding the printer menus

118

Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Supplies Menu

Paper Menu

Reports

Network/Ports

Security

Cyan Cartridge
Magenta Cartridge

Default Source
Paper Size/Type

Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics

Active NIC

Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security Settings

Yellow Cartridge

Substitute Size

Network Setup Page

Standard USB

Confidential Print

Black Cartridge

Paper Texture

Network [x] Setup Page

SMTP Setup

Erase Temporary Data Files

Standard

Network1

Waste Toner Bottle Paper Weight

Shortcut List

Security Audit Log

Imaging Kit

Paper Loading

Fax Job Log

Set Date and Time

Maintenance Kit

Custom Types

Fax Call Log

Custom Names

Copy Shortcuts

Custom Scan Sizes
Universal Setup

E‑mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report

Settings

Help

Manage Shortcuts

Option Card Menu2

General Settings

Print All Guides

Fax Shortcuts

Copy Settings

Copy Guide

E‑mail Shortcuts

[index of each installed
DLE]

Fax Settings

E‑mail Guide

FTP Shortcuts

E‑mail Settings

Fax Guide

Copy Shortcuts

FTP Settings

FTP Guide

Profile Shortcuts

Flash Drive Menu

Print Defects Guide

OCR Settings

Information Guide

Print Settings

Supplies Guide

Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network [x].

This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.

Understanding the printer menus

119

Supplies menu
Use

Cyan Cartridge

View the status of the toner cartridges, which can be any of
the following:
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported

Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Black Cartridge

Waste Toner Bottle
Near Full
Replace
Missing
OK

View the status of the waste toner bottle.

Imaging Kit
OK
Replace Black Imaging Kit
Replace Color Imaging Kit

View the status of the imaging kit.

Maintenance Kit
OK
Replace

View the status of the maintenance kit.

Understanding the printer menus

120

Paper menu
Default Source menu
Menu item

Description

Default Source
Tray [x]
MP feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope

Sets a default paper source for all print jobs
Notes:

• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• The 650-sheet-duo drawer must be installed in order for MP Feeder to
appear as a menu setting in the Paper menu.

• Only installed paper sources will appear as menu settings.
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When
one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.

• A paper source selected by a print job will override the Default Source
setting for the duration of the print job.

Paper Size/Type menu
Use

Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
JIS‑B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Universal

Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one
tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Understanding the printer menus

121

Use

Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Glossy
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]

Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.

MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope

Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Notes:

• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.

• If available, a user‑defined name appears instead of Custom Type [x].
• Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
• Transparency is supported only in the 250‑sheet tray.

Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

• The menu item applies only when the multipurpose feeder (MP Feeder)
is installed.

• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size. The
paper size value must be set.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Understanding the printer menus

122

Use

MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]

Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal

Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.

Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]

Specify the paper type being manually loaded.

Note: Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.

Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Understanding the printer menus

123

Use

Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope

Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.

Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Custom Type [x]

Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.

Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.

Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Substitute Size menu
Menu item

Description

Substitute Size
All Listed
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4

Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available
Notes:

• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available size substitutions are
allowed.

• Off indicates no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a size substitution lets a print job continue without a Change
Paper message appearing.

Paper Texture menu
Use

Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.

Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.

Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

124

Use

Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.

Glossy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded.

Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.

Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.

Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.

Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.

Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.

Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.

Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded.

Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded.

Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Rough is the factory default setting.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

125

Use

Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if custom type is supported.

Paper Weight menu
Menu items

Definition

Plain Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the paper loaded

Card Stock Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the card stock
loaded

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if card stock is
supported.

Transparency Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the transparency
loaded

Recycled Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the recycled paper
loaded

Glossy Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the glossy paper
loaded

Labels Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the labels loaded

Bond Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the bond paper
loaded

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

126

Menu items

Definition

Envelope Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the envelopes
loaded

Rough Envelope Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the envelopes
loaded

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting
• Settings appear only if card stock is
supported.

Letterhead Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the letterhead
loaded

Preprinted Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the preprinted
paper loaded

Colored Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the paper loaded

Light Weight
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the paper loaded

Notes:

• Light is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if paper is supported.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if paper is supported.
Notes:

• Light is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if light paper is
supported.
Heavy Weight
Heavy

Identifies the relative weight of the paper loaded
Notes:

• Heavy is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if heavy paper is
supported.

Understanding the printer menus

127

Menu items

Definition

Rough/Cotton Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the rough/cotton
paper loaded
Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if rough/cotton paper is
supported.

Custom [x] Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Identifies the relative weight of the custom paper
type loaded
Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if custom paper is
supported.

Paper Loading menu
Use

Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type.

Glossy Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Glossy as the paper type.

Bond Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type.

Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type.

Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type.

Colored Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type.

Notes:

• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.

• Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.

Understanding the printer menus

128

Use

Light Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Light as the paper type.

Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type.

Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom type is
supported.

Notes:

• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.

• Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.

Custom Types menu
Menu item

Description

Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope

Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory‑default Custom
Type [x] name or a user‑defined custom name created from the Embedded Web
Server or using MarkVisionTM Professional

Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope

Notes:

• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus
Notes:

• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.

Custom Names menu
Menu item

Definition

Custom Name [x]
[none]

Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces the Custom
Type [x] name in the printer menus.

Understanding the printer menus

129

Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use

Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
Height
Orientation
2 scans per side
Off
On

Specify a custom scan size name, size, and page orientation.
Notes:

• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 216 mm is the
international factory default setting for Width.

• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 356 mm is the
international factory default setting for Height.

• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.

Universal Setup menu
Menu item

Description

Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters

Identifies the unit of measure

Portrait Width
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm

Sets the portrait width

Note: Inches is the US factory default setting. Millimeters is the
international factory default setting.

Notes:

• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased
in 0.01‑inch increments.

• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can
be increased in 1‑mm increments.

• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm

Sets the portrait height
Notes:

• 14 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in
0.01‑inch increments.

• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can
be increased in 1‑mm increments.

• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge

Specifies the feed direction
Notes:

• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported by the tray.

Understanding the printer menus

130

Reports menu
Reports menu
Menu item

Description

Menu Settings Page

Prints a report containing information about the paper loaded into trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language,
TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other
information

Device Statistics

Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details
about printed pages

Network Setup Page

Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers.

Shortcut List

Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts

Fax Job Log

Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.

Fax Call Log

Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,
and blocked calls
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.

Copy Shortcuts

Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts

E‑mail Shortcuts

Prints a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts

Fax Shortcuts

Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts

FTP Shortcuts

Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts

Profiles List

Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer

Print Fonts

Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer

Print Directory

Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk
Notes:

• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed
correctly and working.
Asset Report

Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned
into an asset database.

Understanding the printer menus

131

Network/Ports
Active NIC menu
Menu item

Description

Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed.

Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu; all inactive ports are omitted.
Menu item

Description

PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off

Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off

Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Auto
Off

Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding the printer menus

132

Menu item

Description

Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]

Sets the size of the network input buffer
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto

Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing. This menu
only appears if a formatted printer hard disk is installed.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
Auto
On
Off

Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs

Standard Network Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
AppleTalk

Displays and sets the printer network settings

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.

Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
AppleTalk

Reports menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:

Understanding the printer menus

133

Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network Setup > Reports or Network
Reports
Menu item

Description

Print Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address

Network Card menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Menu item

Description

View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected

Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card

View Card Speed

Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card

Network Address
UAA
LAA

Lets you view the network addresses

Job Timeout

Sets the amount of time in seconds before a network print job is canceled

Note: 90 seconds is the factory default setting.

10–225
Banner Page

Allows the printer to print a banner page

Off

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use

Set Hostname

Set the current TCP/IP hostname.

IP Address

View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.

Netmask

View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.

Gateway

View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.

Understanding the printer menus

134

Use

Enable DHCP
On
Off

Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.

Enable RARP
On
Off

Specify the RARP address assignment setting.

Enable BOOTP
On
Off

Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.

Enable AutoIP
Yes
No

Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.

Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No

Send files to the printer using the built‑in FTP server.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No

Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server) which lets you monitor and
manage the printer remotely using a Web browser.

WINS Server Address

View or change the current WINS server address.

Enable DDNS
Yes
No

View or change the current DDNS setting.

Enable mDNS
Yes
No

View or change the current mDNS setting.

DNS Server Address

View or change the current DNS server address.

Backup DNS Server Address [x]

View or change the current DNS server address.

Enable HTTPS
Yes
No

View or change the current HTTPS setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

IPv6 menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers.

Understanding the printer menus

135

Menu item

Description

Enable IPv6
On
Off

Enables IPv6 in the printer

Auto Configuration
On
Off

Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
address configuration entries provided by a router

Set Hostname

Lets you view or change the current IPv6 host name

View Address

Lets you view the current setting

View Router Address

Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.

Enable DHCPv6
On
Off

Enables DHCPv6 in the printer

Note: On is the factory default setting.

AppleTalk menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use

Activate
Yes
No

Enable or disable AppleTalk support.

View Name

Show the assigned AppleTalk name.

Note: No is the factory default setting.

Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address

Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.

Set Zone
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
[list of zones available on the network] Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

136

Standard USB menu
Menu item

Description

PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off

Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off

Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Auto
On
Off

Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
USB Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Disabled

Sets the size of the USB input buffer
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.

• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding the printer menus

137

Menu item

Description

Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto

Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
Auto
On
Off

Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs

ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Sets the network address information for an external print server

ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Sets the netmask information for an external print server

ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Sets the gateway information for an external print server

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.

SMTP Setup menu
Menu item

Description

Primary SMTP Gateway

Specifies SMTP server gateway and port information

Primary SMTP Gateway Port

Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.

Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30

Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.

Reply Address

Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer

Understanding the printer menus

138

Menu item

Description

Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required

Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server
Notes:

• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.

SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5

Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
privileges

Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials

Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.

Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.

Notes:

User‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User

• None is the factory default setting for Device and User‑Initiated
E‑mail.

• Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.

Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain

Security menu
Editing Security Setups menu
Menu item

Description

Edit Backup Password

Creates a backup password
Note: This menu item will only appear if a backup password exists.

Edit Building Blocks

Edits the Internal Accounts, NTLM, various Setups, Password, and PIN

Edit Security Templates

Adds or edits a Security Template

Edit Access Controls

Controls access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points

Understanding the printer menus

139

Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use

Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:

• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts. “3 attempts” is the factory
default setting.

• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 60
minutes. “5 minutes” is the factory default setting.

• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is the
factory default setting. 1 indicates that the printer does not impose a lockout
time.

• Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the home
screen before automatically logging off the user. Settings range from 1 to 900
seconds. “30 seconds” is the factory default setting.

• Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging off the user. Settings range from 1 to 120
minutes. “10 minutes” is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
No Effect
Access controls=“No Security”
Reset factory security defaults

Adjust the security settings.
Notes:

• No Effect means the reset has no effect on the printer security configuration.
• Access controls=’No Security’ retains all the security information that the user
has defined. No Security is the factory default setting.

• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and restores the factory default settings in the Miscellaneous
Security menu.
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never

Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Notes:

• “Demand” is the factory default setting. This means a server certificate is
requested. If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided, then
the session is terminated immediately.

• “Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session
is terminated immediately.

• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will
be ignored and the session proceeds normally.

• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16

Limit the digit length of the personal identification number (PIN).
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

140

Confidential Print menu
Menu item

Description

Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10

Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered
Notes:

• This menu appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
• Once the limit is reached, the print job for that user name and that PIN are deleted.

Confidential Job Expiration Limits the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted
Off
Notes:
1 hour
• If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside on the
4 hours
printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not
24 hours
change to the new default value.
1 week
• If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs

Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification

Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Erase Temporary Data Files menu
Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file
system. All permanent data on the hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.

Understanding the printer menus

141

Use

Wiping Mode
Off
Auto
Manual

Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.

Automatic Method
Single pass
Multi‑pass

Specify a method for automatic disk wiping.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Single pass is the factory default setting.
• Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple pass
method.

Manual Method
Single pass
Multi‑pass

Specify a method for manual disk wiping.

Scheduled Method
Single pass
Multi‑pass

Specify a method for a scheduled disk wiping.

Note: Single pass is the factory default setting.

Security Audit Log menu
Menu item

Description

Export Log

Enables an authorized user to export the security log
Notes:

• To export the log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be
attached to the printer.

• From the Embedded Web Server, the log can be downloaded to a computer.
Delete Log
Yes
No

Specifies whether audit logs are deleted
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

Menu item

142

Description

Configure Log
Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created
Enable Audit
Note: Factory default settings enable the security audit log.
Enable Remote Syslog
Remote Syslog Server
Remote Syslog Port
Remote Syslog Method
Remote Syslog Facility
Log full behavior
Admin’s e-mail address
Digitally sign exports
Severity of events to log
Remote Syslog non-logged
events
E-mail log cleared alert
E-mail log wrapped alert
E-mail % full alert
% full alert level
E-mail log exported alert
E-mail log settings changed alert
Log line endings

Set Date and Time menu
Menu item

Description

Current Date and Time

Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer

Manually Set Date and Time
[input date and time]

Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.

Time Zone
[list of time zones]

Note: GMT is the factory default setting.

Automatically Observe DST
On
Off

Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.

Custom Time Zone Setup
UTC Offset
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset

Enables the user to setup the time zone

Understanding the printer menus

143

Menu item

Description

Enable NTP
On
Off

Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network

NTP Server
[NTP Server Address]

Lets you view the NTP Server Address

Enable Authentication
Off
On

Lets you change the authentication setting to On or Off

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use

Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portugues
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese

Set the language of the text appearing on the display.

Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper

Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.

Note: Not all languages are available for all models. You may
need to install a special hardware for some languages.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its
factory default settings.

• When setting Eco‑Mode to Energy or Paper, performance
may be affected, but print quality is not.

Understanding the printer menus

144

Use

ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled

Specify whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded.

Quiet Mode
Off
On

Minimize the printer noise.

Run Initial setup
Yes
No

Run the setup wizard.

Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portugues
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]

Specify a language and custom key information for the display
keyboard.

Paper Sizes
U.S.
Metric

Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.

Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• U.S. is the factory default setting.
• The initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.

Understanding the printer menus

145

Use

Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]

Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.

Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]

Specify what is displayed in the upper corners of the home screen.
For Left side and Right side, select from the following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:

• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner
Cyan Toner
Magenta Toner
Yellow Toner
Fuser
Transfer Module

Customize the displayed information for supplies.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Note: Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
display.

Understanding the printer menus

146

Use

Displayed Information (continued)
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors

Customize the displayed information for certain menus.
Select from the following options:
Display
Yes
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Note: No is the factory default setting for Display.

Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by User

Change the icons that appear on the home screen.

Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD

Format the date.

For each icon, select from the following options:
Display
Do not display

Note: MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting. DD-MMYYYY is the international factory default setting.

Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock

Format the time.

Screen Brightness
20–100

Specify the brightness of the display.

One Page Copy
Off
On

Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.

Note: 12 hour A.M./P.M. is the factory default setting.

Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

147

Use

Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
Off

Set the audio volume for the buttons.

Volume
1–10

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.

Show Bookmarks
Yes
No

Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.

Allow Background Removal
On
Off

Specify whether image background removal is allowed.

Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off

Scan multiple jobs to one file.

Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level

Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs
in the ADF.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.

Notes:

• Job level is the factory default setting. If Job level is selected,
then rescan the entire job.

• If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page
forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300

Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.

Contact Name

Specify a contact name.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server.

Location

Specify the location.
Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.

Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm

Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention.
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:

• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control and
Cartridge Alarm. This sounds several quick beeps.

• Continuous repeats several quick beeps in a regular interval.

Understanding the printer menus

148

Use

Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240

Set the amount of time before the printer enters a lower power
state.

Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–240

Set the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before
it goes into a reduced power state.

Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 20 minutes is the factory default setting.
• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.

• Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical
circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the
room.

• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.

• Disabled appears only if Energy Conserve is set to Off.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
20 minutes
1–3 hours
6 hours
1–3 days
1–2 weeks
1 month

Set the amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.

Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate

Set the printer to Hibernate mode even if there is an active Ethernet
connection.

Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300

Set the amount of time the printer waits before returning the
display to Ready state.

Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255

Set the amount of time the printer waits to receive an end‑of‑job
message before canceling the rest of the job.

Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.

Note: Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.

Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed.

• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.

Understanding the printer menus

149

Use

Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535

Set the amount of time the printer waits for additional data before
canceling a print job.
Notes:

• 40 seconds is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation.

Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255

Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:

• 30 is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto

Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when not resolved within the specified time period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.

• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On

Successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.

• On sets the printer to print the entire page.
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep

Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.

Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep

Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a long press
of the Sleep button.

Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.

Note: Do Nothing is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

150

Use

Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now

Use the printer factory default settings.
Notes:

• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting.
• Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored
in the flash memory or in a hard disk are not affected.

Export Compressed Logs File
Export

Export configuration files to a flash drive.

Copy Settings menu
Use

Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Color
Auto
On
Off

Specify whether copies are printed in color.

Auto Color Detect
Color Sensitivity
1–9
Area Sensitivity
1–9

Set the amount of color the printer can detect from the original document.

Allow color copies
On
Off

Enable color in copies.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: This menu item is applicable only when Color is set to Auto.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• Setting this to Off hides all color‑specific menus.
• This setting overrides the Color setting.

Understanding the printer menus

151

Use

Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided

Specify whether an original document is two‑sided or one‑sided, and then specify
whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.

Paper Saver
Off
2 on 1 Portrait
2 on 1 Landscape
4 on 1 Portrait
4 on 1 Landscape

Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.

Print Page Borders
On
Off

Specify whether a border is printed.

Collate
On [1,2,1,2,1,2]
Off [1,1,1,2,2,2]

Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card

Specify the size of the original document.

Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for copy jobs.

Transparency Separators
On
Off

Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.

Note: 1 sided to 1 sided is the factory default setting. This setting is selected when
using a one-sided original document for a one-sided copy job.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

152

Use

Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages

Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.

Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Number of Copies
1–999

Specify the number of copies for the copy job.

Header/Footer
[Location]
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text

Specify header/footer information and its location on the page.

Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off

Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.

Custom Overlay

Specify the custom overlay text.

Allow priority copies
On
Off

Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.

Custom Job scanning
On
Off

Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Select from the following location options:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Top left
Top middle
Top right
Bottom left
Bottom middle
Bottom right

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting for the location.
• All pages is the factory default setting for Print on.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.

Understanding the printer menus

153

Use

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.

Auto Center
Off
On

Automatically align the content at the center of the page.

Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue

Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.

Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255

Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast of the output.

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.

Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

154

Use

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Sample Copy
Off
On

Create a sample copy of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.

General Fax Settings
Use

Restore Factory Defaults

Restore the factory defaults of all fax settings.

Optimize Fax Compatibility

Optimize fax compatibility with other fax machines.

Station Name

Specify the name of the fax in the printer.

Station Number

Specify the telephone number assigned to the fax.

Station ID
Station Name
Station Number

Specify how the fax is identified.

Enable Manual Fax
On
Off

Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.

Note: Station Number is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.

• Press # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send

Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.

Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow

Specify whether canceling of fax jobs is allowed.

Note: Equal is the factory default setting.

Note: Allow is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

155

Use

Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right

Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.

Digits to Mask
0–58

Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.

Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]

Configure the fax cover page.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to Mask setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.
• Off is the factory default setting for all other menu items.

Fax Send Settings
Use

Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi

Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but
increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

156

Use

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.

Specify the size of the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge

Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two-sided
scanning.

Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Dial Prefix

Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.

Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]

Establish a dialing prefix rule.

Automatic Redial
0–9

Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.

Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Text is the factory default setting.

Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

157

Use

Redial frequency
1–200

Specify the number of minutes between redials.

Behind a PABX
Yes
No

Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.

Enable ECM
Yes
No

Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.

Enable Fax Scans
On
Off

Fax files that are scanned at the printer.

Driver to fax
Yes
No

Allow the print driver to send fax jobs.

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.

Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse

Specify the dialing sound.

Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600

Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.

Custom Job scanning
On
Off

Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.

Scan Preview
On
Off

Show whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue

Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: No is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Tone is the factory default setting.

Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

158

Use

Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255

Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast in the scanned image.

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the sharpness of a fax.

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
while warm values generate a redder output than the default.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.

Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax Scans
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use

Enable color faxing.
Note: Off by default is the factory default setting.

Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Faxes
Note: On is the factory default setting.
On
Off

Understanding the printer menus

159

Fax Receive Settings
Use

Enable Fax Receive
On
Off

Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.

Enable Caller ID
On
Off

Display the caller ID information of an incoming fax.

Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies

Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
resources.

Rings to Answer
1–25

Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.

Auto Reduction
On
Off

Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source.

Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Feeder

Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.

Separator Sheets
Off
Before Job
After Job

Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.

Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
On

Enable two‑sided printing for incoming fax jobs.

Fax Footer
On
Off

Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.

Fax Footer Time Stamp
Print Time
Receive Time

Print the time when the fax was received.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Receive Time is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

160

Use

Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600

Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.

Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward

Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.

Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF

Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded.

Forward to Shortcut

Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS,
or eSF).

Block No Name Fax
Off
On

Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID
specified.

Banned Fax List

Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.

Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule

Enable the printer to hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held
faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.

Enable Color Fax Receive
On
Off

Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale.

Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.

Note: Print is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Fax is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only from the Embedded Web Server.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Fax Log Settings
Use

Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error

Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.

Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error

Enable printing of a receive error log.

Note: Print log is the factory default setting.

Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

161

Use

Auto Print Logs
On
Off

Enable automatic printing of fax logs.

Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.

Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number

Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax
name returned.

Enable Job Log
On
Off

Enable access to the Fax Job log.

Enable Call Log
On
Off

Enable access to the Fax Call log.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Speaker Settings
Use

Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On

Specify the mode of the speaker.

Speaker Volume
High
Low

Set the speaker volume to high or low.

Ringer Volume
Off
On

Enable or disable the ringer volume.

Note: On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the
fax connection is made.

Note: High is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Answer On
Use
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only

To
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

162

Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Menu item

Description

To Format

Lets you enter specific fax information using the virtual keyboard on the printer
control panel

Reply Address
Subject
Message
SMTP Setup

Specifies SMTP setup information

Primary SMTP Gateway

Specifies SMTP server port information

Secondary SMTP Gateway
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)

Specifies the image type for scanning to fax

Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics

This option tells the printer the original document type and source.

Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Black and White Laser
Other

Specifies how the content was originally produced

Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi

Specifies the resolution level for scanning to fax

Darkness
1–9

Lightens or darkens the output

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specifies the orientation of the scanned image

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

163

Menu item

Description

Original Size
Mixed Sizes
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 xn 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A4
A5
A6
Oficio (Mexico)
JIS B5
Book Original
Mixed Sizes

Specifies the paper size of the document being scanned

Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off

Lets you save scan jobs into multiple‑page or single-page TIFF files. For a multiplepage scan‑to‑fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple
TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the scan job.

Note: Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enable Analog Receive
Off
On

Enables receiving of analog faxes
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

E‑mail Settings menu
Use

E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name

Specify e‑mail server information.

E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On

Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
Note: Never appears is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

164

Use

E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB

Specify the maximum e-mail size.

E‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message

Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.

E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations

Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e‑mail
destinations only to that domain name.

Note: E-mails bigger than the specified maximum size are not sent.

Notes:

• E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
• The limit is one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link

Define the e‑mail server Web link settings.

Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)

Specify the file format.

PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On

Configure the PDF settings.

Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.

Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This menu item
appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.

• Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF. Secure
PDF requires you to enter your password twice.

Understanding the printer menus

165

Use

Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Color
Off
On

Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.

Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi

Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specify the orientation of the scanned image.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

166

Use

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.

Specify the size of the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge

Specify the orientation of the original document loaded in the ADF for two‑sided
scanning.

JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.

Text Default
5–90

Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.

Text/Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.

Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.

E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link

Specify how the images are sent.

Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off

Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.

Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG

Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

167

Use

Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error

Specify whether to print the transmission log.

Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.

E‑mail Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit

Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off.

Custom Job scanning
On
Off

Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.

Scan Preview
On
Off

Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.

Note: Print log is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue

Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

168

Use

Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255

Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast of the output.

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
while warm values generate a redder output than the default.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.

Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Use cc:/bcc:
Off
On

Enable the use of the cc: and bcc: fields.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

169

FTP Settings menu
Use

Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)

Specify the file format.

PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On

Configure the PDF settings.

Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Color
Off
On

Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.

Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This menu item
appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.

• Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF. Secure
PDF requires you to enter your password twice.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

170

Use

Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi

Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specify the orientation of the scanned image.

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.

Specify the size of the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge

Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two‑sided
scanning.

JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.

Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Text Default
5–90

Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

171

Use

Text/Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.

Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off

Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.

Note: 50 is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG

Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.

Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error

Specify whether to print the transmission log.

Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.

FTP bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit

Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.

File Name

Type a base file name.

Custom Job Scanning
On
Off

Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.

Scan Preview
On
Off

Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.

Note: LZW is the factory default setting.

Note: Print log is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.

Color Balance
Cyan‑Red
Magenta‑Green
Yellow‑Blue

Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

172

Use

Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255

Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast of the output.

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the amount of sharpness of the scanned image.

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Enable the user to specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output
than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.

Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

173

Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Use

Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)

Specify the file format.

PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On

Configure the PDF settings.

Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Color
On
Off

Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.

Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression.
• Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF. Secure
PDF requires you to enter your password twice.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

174

Use

Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi

Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specify the orientation of the scanned image.

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.

Specify the size of the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge

Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two‑sided
scanning.

JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.

Text Default
5–90

Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.

Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

Understanding the printer menus

175

Use

Text/Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.

Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.

Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG

Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.

Scan Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit

Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.

File Name

Type a base file name.

Custom Job Scanning
On
Off

Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.

Scan Preview
On
Off

Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.

Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue

Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.

Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255

Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.

Note: LZW is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.

Understanding the printer menus

176

Use

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast of the scanned image.

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
while warm values generate a redder output than the default.

Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Print Settings
Copies
1–999

Specify a default number of copies for each print job.

Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope

Set a default paper source for all print jobs.

Color
Color
Black only

Specify whether to print the document in color.

Collate
On [1,2,1,2,1,2]
Off [1,1,1,2,2,2]

Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided

Enable two‑sided printing for incoming print jobs.

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: Color is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge

177

Define binding for two-sided pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:

• Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long edge of the
page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and
left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Auto
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Portrait
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up

Print multiple-page images on one side of the paper.

Paper Saver Border
None
Solid

Print a border on each page image.

Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical

Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.

Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages

Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or in
landscape orientation.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Tray [x]
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print

Specify whether to insert blank pages in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

178

OCR Settings menu
Use

Auto Rotate
On
Off

Automatically rotate scanned documents for proper orientation.

Despeckle
Off
On

Remove specks from a scanned image.

Inverse Detection
On
Off

Recognize and make the white text on a black background editable.

Auto Contrast Enhance
Off
On

Automatically adjust the contrast to improve OCR quality.

Recognized Languages
English
French
German
Spanish
Italian
Portugues
Danish
Dutch
Norwegian
Swedish
Finnish
Hungarian
Polish

Set the language or languages that the OCR can recognize.
For each language, select from the following options:
Off
On

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: The language is enabled by default. If it is set to a value that is not in the list
of recognized languages, English is enabled by default.

Print Settings
Setup menu
Menu item

Description

Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation

Sets the default printer language
Notes:

• PCL Emulation is the factory default printer language.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.

Understanding the printer menus

179

Menu item

Description

Job Waiting
Off
On

Specifies that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are
stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When
the missing information and/or options are obtained, the stored
jobs print.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a non-read‑only printer hard
disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs
are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Fit to Page
Whole Page

Sets the logical and physical printable area
Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.

• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary.
Whole Page only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e
interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages printed using
the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Printer Usage
Max Yield
Max Speed

Sets color toner use in printing

Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk

Sets the storage location for downloads

Notes:

• Max Yield is the default printer setting.
• The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting
Notes:

• RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in RAM
is temporary.

• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.

• This menu appears only when a flash and/or disk option is
installed.

Understanding the printer menus

180

Menu item

Description

Resource Save
Off
On

Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a job
that requires more memory than is available
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain
the downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are
deleted in order to process print jobs.

• On retains the downloads during language changes and
printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then 38
Memory Full appears, and downloads are not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First

Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All is selected
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always
appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.

Finishing menu
Menu item

Description

Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided

Specifies whether duplex (2‑sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobs
Notes:

• 1 sided is the factory default setting.
• You can set 2-sided printing from the software program. For Windows users,
click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the
print dialog and pop-up menus.

Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge

Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the
page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Notes:

• Long Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999

Specifies a default number of copies for each print job

Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print

Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

181

Menu item

Description

Collate
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)

Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.
• Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copies
menu setting.

Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages

Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page
2's.

• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a
document for notes.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specifies the paper source for separator sheets

Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up

Specifies that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper

Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical

Specifies the positioning of multiple‑page images

Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print on each
page.

Notes:

• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in
portrait or landscape orientation.

Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait

Specifies the orientation of a multiple‑page sheet

Paper Saver Border
None
Solid

Prints a border on each page image

Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

182

Quality menu
Use

Print Mode
Color
Black Only

Specify whether to print images in color.

Color Correction
Auto
Off
Manual

Adjust the color output on the printed page.

Print Resolution
1200 dpi
4800 CQ

Specify the output resolution in dots per inch (dpi) or in color quality (CQ).

Toner Darkness
1–5

Lighten or darken the output.

Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off

Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts.

Color Saver
On
Off

Reduce the amount of toner used for graphics and images.

RGB Brightness
‑6 to 6

Adjust the brightness of the output.

RGB Contrast
0–5

Adjust the contrast of the output.

RGB Saturation
0–5

Adjust saturation in color outputs.

Color Balance
Cyan
‑5 to 5
Magenta
‑5 to 5
Yellow
‑5 to 5
Black
‑5 to 5
Reset Defaults

Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.

Note: Color is the factory default setting.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Note: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting.

Note: 4 is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• On overrides the Toner Darkness setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

183

Use

Color Samples
sRGB Display
sRGB Vivid
Display—True Black
Vivid
Off—RGB
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off—CMYK

Print sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the
printer.

Manual Color
RGB Image
RGB Text
RGB Graphics

Customize the RGB color conversions.
Select from the following options:
Vivid
sRGB Display
Display—True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
Notes:

• sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image.
• sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics.
Manual Color (continued)
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
CMYK Graphics

Customize the CMYK color conversions.
Select from the following options:
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
Note: US CMYK is the U.S. factory default setting. Euro CMYK is the international
factory default setting.

Color Adjust

Initiate a recalibration of color conversion tables and allow the printer to make
adjustments for color variations in output.

Spot Color Replacement

Assign specific CMYK values to named spot colors.
Note: This menu is available only on the Embedded Web Server.

RGB Replacement

Match the colors of the output with that of the original document.
Note: This menu is available only on the Embedded Web Server.

Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed. The printer hard disk
cannot be read/write‑ or write‑protected.

Understanding the printer menus

184

Menu item

Description

Job Accounting Log
Off
On

Determines if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives

Job Accounting Utilities

Lets you print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive

Accounting Log Frequency
Monthly
Weekly

Determines how often a log file is created

Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log

Determines how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires

Disk Near Full Level
1–99
Off

Specifies the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near
Full Action

Disk Near Full Action
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current

Determines how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full

Disk Full Action
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current

Determines how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit
(100MB)

URL to Post Logs

Determines where the printer posts job accounting logs

E‑mail Address to Send Logs

Specifies the e‑mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs

Log File Prefix

Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Note: 5MB is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting.
• The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

185

Utilities menu
Menu item

Description

Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All

Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk
Notes:

• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.

• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Yes
No

Formats the flash memory
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:

• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option
card in the printer.

• A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating
properly for this menu item to be available.

• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete

Removes downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs
Notes:

• Delete Now configures the printer control panel to return to the originating
screen after the deletion process is completed.

• Do Not Delete sets the printer control panel to return to the main Utilities
menu.
Activate Hex Trace

Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem
Notes:

• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.

• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the printer off or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
Off
On

Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

186

XPS menu
Menu item

Description

Print Error Pages
Off
On

Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

PDF menu
Menu item

Description

Scale to Fit
No
Yes

Scales page content to fit the selected page size

Annotations
Do Not Print
Print

Specifies whether to print annotations in the PDF

Note: No is the factory default setting.

Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

PostScript menu
Menu item

Description

Print PS Error
Off
On

Prints a page containing the PostScript error

Lock PS Startup Mode
Off
On

Enables users to disable the SysStart file

Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk

Establishes the font search order

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only if a formatted flash memory option card
or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.

• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.

• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Image Smoothing
Off
On

Enhances the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images and smooths
their color transitions
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in
resolution.

Understanding the printer menus

187

PCL Emul menu
Menu item

Description

Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All

Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item
Notes:

• Resident is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory default
set of fonts downloaded in RAM.

• Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option.
• The Flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write‑,
write‑, or password‑protected.

• Download shows all the fonts downloaded in RAM.
• All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10

Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored

Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850

Specifies the symbol set for each font name

Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for download.

Notes:

• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.

• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00

Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts
Notes:

• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.

• Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100

Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts
Notes:

•
•
•
•

10 is the factory default setting.
Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but
cannot be changed.

Understanding the printer menus

188

Menu item

Description

PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page
Notes:

• Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.

• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
60
64

Specifies the number of lines that print on each page

PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm

Sets the printer to print on A4‑size paper

Notes:

• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired
Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.

Notes:

• 198 mm is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of
eighty 10‑pitch characters.

PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
Off
On

Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command

PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
Off
On

Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command

Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199

Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• None is not an available selection. It is only displayed when it is selected
by the PCL 5 interpreter. It also ignores the Select Paper Feed command.

• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.

Understanding the printer menus

189

Menu item

Description

Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
None

Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder

Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No

Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings

HTML menu
Menu Item
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers

Description
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO

Sets the default font for HTML documents
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.

Menu item

Description

Font Size
1–255 pt

Sets the default font size for HTML documents
Notes:

• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.

Understanding the printer menus

190

Menu item

Description

Scale
1–400%

Scales the default font for HTML documents
Notes:

• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Sets the page orientation for HTML documents

Margin Size
8–255 mm

Sets the page margin for HTML documents

Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Print
Do Not Print

Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents
Note: Print is the factory default setting.

Image menu
Menu item

Description

Auto Fit
On
Off

Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation

Invert
Off
On

Inverts bi‑tonal monochrome images

Scaling
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Anchor Top Left

Scales the image to fit the selected paper size

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Rev Portrait
Rev Landscape

Sets the image orientation

Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
for some images.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Notes:

• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.

Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

191

PictBridge menu
Menu item

Description

Photo Size
Auto
L
2L
Hagaki Postcard
Card Size
100 x 150 mm
4 x 6 in
8 x 10 in
Letter
A4
A5
JIS B5

Controls the printed size of each photo printed from a PictBridge‑enabled device

Layout
Auto
Off
2 Up
3 Up
4 Up
6 Up
9 Up
12 Up
16 Up
Index Print

Determines the maximum number of images that can be printed on one side of paper

Quality
Normal
Draft
Fine

Determines which resolution, toner darkness, and color saver values the device uses
when printing photos sent from a PictBridge‑enabled device

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• If both the printer and the PictBridge‑enabled camera have a value for this
setting, the value in the camera supersedes the value in the printer.

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• If both the printer and the PictBridge‑enabled camera have a value for this
setting, the value in the camera supersedes the value in the printer.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• If both the printer and the PictBridge‑enabled camera have a value for this
setting, the value in the camera supersedes the value in the printer.

Paper Source
MP Feeder
Tray [x]
Manual Paper

Identifies the printer default input source when printing photos from a
PictBridge‑enabled device
Notes:

• MP Feeder is the factory default setting.
• A photo size larger than the size of the media installed in the printer input
source cannot be selected.

Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They
contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.

Understanding the printer menus

192

English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer.
Other translations are available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
Menu item

Description

Print All Guides

Prints all the guides

Copy Guide

Provides information about making copies and changing settings

Fax Guide

Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and about changing settings

E‑mail Guide

Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or
the address book, and about changing settings

FTP Guide

Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings

Print Defects Guide

Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints

Information Guide

Provides help in locating additional information

Supplies Guide

Provides part numbers for ordering supplies

Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory

193

Securing the printer hard disk and other installed
memory
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings, information
from embedded solutions, and user data. The types of memory—along with the types of data stored by each—are
described below.

• Volatile memory—Your device utilizes standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data
during simple print and copy jobs.

• Non‑volatile memory—Your device may utilize two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND (flash
memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and
bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.

• Hard disk memory—Some devices have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for
device‑specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print‑related. The hard
disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information, create folders, create disk or network file
shares, or FTP information directly from a client device. The hard disk can retain buffered user data from complex
scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
There are several circumstances under which you might wish to erase the contents of the memory devices installed in
your printer. A partial list includes:

•
•
•
•
•
•

The printer is being decommissioned
The printer hard drive is being replaced
The printer is being moved to a different department or location
The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization
The printer is being removed from your premises for service
The printer is being sold to another organization

Disposing of a hard drive
Note: Not all printers have a hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to ensure that confidential data stored on
the printer hard disk cannot be accessed once the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises. While
most data can be erased electronically, you may want to consider one or more of the following actions before disposing
of a printer or hard disk:

• Degaussing—Flushes the hard drive with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: While most data can be erased electronically, the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each memory device on which data could have been stored.

Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory

194

Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed on your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the
buffered data, simply power down the device.

Erasing non‑volatile memory
• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information
and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.

• Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down

2 ABC

and

6 MNO

while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress

bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.

3 Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will reboot several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords on the printer.

4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:

• Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
• Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left
by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.

Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.

3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.

Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory

195

Notes:

• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.

5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Note: Your printer may not have a hard disk installed.
Enabling hard disk encryption helps prevent the loss of sensitive data in the event your printer or its hard disk is stolen.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.

2 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:

• Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.

3 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down

2 ABC

and

6 MNO

while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress

bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. Once the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or
Fax.

3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer will
return to the Enable/Disable screen.
Notes:

• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.

Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory

• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.

5 Touch Back, and then Exit Config Menu.
The printer will power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

196

Maintaining the printer

197

Maintaining the printer
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.

Cleaning the exterior of the printer
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.

2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3 Dampen a clean, lint‑free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.

4 Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.

5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.

Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
Note: Clean both areas of the scanner glass and both white underside areas.

1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.
1

2
4

Maintaining the printer

White underside ADF cover

White underside scanner glass cover

Scanner glass

ADF glass

198

3 Wipe the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.
4 Wipe the white underside of the scanner cover until it is clean and dry.
5 Close the scanner cover.

Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Direct sunlight
Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
High humidity above 80%
Salty air
Corrosive gases
Heavy dust

Checking the status of supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.

Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.

Checking the status of supplies from a network computer
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

Maintaining the printer

199

Ordering supplies
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies
dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact the
place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.

Ordering toner cartridges
When 88.xx [Color] cartridge low appears, order a new toner cartridge.
When 88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low appears, you must replace the specified cartridge.
Part name

Lexmark Return Program

Regular

Black toner cartridge

C540A1KG

Not applicable

Cyan toner cartridge

C540A1CG

Not applicable

Magenta toner cartridge

C540A1MG

Not applicable

Yellow toner cartridge

C540A1YG

Not applicable

Black high‑yield toner cartridge

C540H1KG

C540H2KG

Cyan high‑yield toner cartridge

C540H1CG

C540H2CG

Magenta high‑yield toner cartridge

C540H1MG

C540H2MG

Yellow high‑yield toner cartridge

C540H1YG

C540H2YG

Black extra‑high‑yield toner cartridge

C544X1KG

C544X2KG

C546U1KG
C546U2KG
Cyan extra‑high‑yield toner cartridge

C544X1CG

C544X2CG

Magenta extra‑high‑yield toner
cartridge

C544X1MG

C544X2MG

Yellow extra‑high‑yield toner cartridge C544X1YG

C544X2YG

Ordering imaging kits
Part name

Part number

Black and color imaging kit

C540X74G

Black imaging kit

C540X71G

Ordering a waste toner bottle
When 82 Replace Waste Toner appears, order a replacement waste toner bottle. The waste toner bottle must
be replaced when 82 Replace Waste Toner appears.

Maintaining the printer

200

Part name

Part number

Waste toner bottle

C540X75G

Replacing supplies
Replacing the waste toner bottle
Replace the waste toner bottle when 82 Replace waste toner appears. The printer will not continue printing
until the waste toner bottle is replaced.

1 Unpack the replacement waste toner bottle.
2 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

3 Open the top door.

Maintaining the printer

4 Remove the right side cover.

5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove it.

6 Place the waste toner bottle in the enclosed packaging.

201

Maintaining the printer

202

7 Insert the new waste toner bottle.

8 Replace the right side cover.

9 Close the top door.

Maintaining the printer

10 Close the front door.

Replacing a black and color imaging kit
Replace the black and color imaging kit when Replace Color Imaging Kit appears.

1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

203

Maintaining the printer

2 Open the top door.

3 Remove the toner cartridges by lifting the handles, and then gently pulling away from the imaging kit.

4 Remove the right side cover.

204

Maintaining the printer

205

5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and remove it.

6 Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull it toward you.

7 Press down on the blue levers, grasp the green handles on the sides, and then pull the imaging kit out.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.

Maintaining the printer

8 Unpack the replacement black and color imaging kit.
Leave the packaging on the developer units.

9 Gently shake the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units side to side.
10 Remove the red shipping cover from the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units.

11 Insert the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units.

12 Place the used black and color imaging kit in the enclosed package.

206

Maintaining the printer

13 Align and insert the imaging kit.

14 Replace the waste toner bottle.

207

Maintaining the printer

208

15 Replace the right side cover.

16 Replace the toner cartridges.

17 Close the top door.

Maintaining the printer

18 Close the front door.

Replacing a toner cartridge
Replace the specified toner cartridge (yellow, cyan, magenta, or black) when 88.xx [Color] cartridge
critically low appears. The printer will not continue printing until the specified cartridge is replaced.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage caused by use of a non‑Lexmark toner cartridge is not covered under
warranty.
Note: Degraded print quality may result from using non‑Lexmark toner cartridges.

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready or 88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low appears.
2 Unpack the new cartridge, and set it near the printer.
3 Open the top door.

209

Maintaining the printer

4 Remove the toner cartridge by lifting the handle, and then gently pull away from the imaging kit.

5 Align the new toner cartridge, and then press down until it is all the way into the slot.

210

Maintaining the printer

211

6 Close the top door.

Replacing a developer unit
Replace a developer unit when a print quality defect occurs or when damage occurs to the printer.

Maintaining the printer

2 Open the top door.

3 Remove the toner cartridges by lifting the handles and then gently pulling away from the imaging kit.

4 Remove the right side cover.

212

Maintaining the printer

213

5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove it.

6 Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull it toward you.

7 Press down on the blue levers, grasp the handles on the sides, and then pull the imaging kit out.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.

Maintaining the printer

8 Remove the used developer unit.

9 Place the used developer in the enclosed package.
10 Unpack the replacement developer unit.
Leave the packaging on the developer unit.

11 Gently shake the developer unit side to side.
12 Remove the red shipping cover from the developer unit.

214

Maintaining the printer

13 Insert the developer unit.

14 Align and insert the imaging kit.

215

Maintaining the printer

15 Replace the waste toner bottle.

16 Replace the right side cover.

17 Replace the toner cartridges.

216

Maintaining the printer

217

18 Close the top door.

19 Close the front door.

Moving the printer
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:

Maintaining the printer

218

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.

Moving the printer to another location
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:

• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart
used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.

• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.

Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.

Administrative support

219

Administrative support
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server —
Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Using the Embedded Web Server
If the printer is installed on a network, then the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including:

•
•
•
•
•

Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel
Checking the status of the printer supplies
Configuring printer settings
Configuring network settings
Viewing reports

To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Notes:

• If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page, and then locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Embedded Web Server correctly.
2 Press Enter.

Checking the printer status
You can view paper tray settings, the level of toner in the toner cartridges, the percentage of life remaining in the
maintenance kit, and capacity measurements of certain printer parts from the Device Status page of the Embedded
Web Server.

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

Checking the virtual display
1 Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer.
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Administrative support

220

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel, showing printer messages.

Setting up e‑mail alerts
You can have the printer send you an e‑mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed,
added, or when there is a paper jam.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items for notification, and type the e‑mail address to receive the alerts.
5 Click Submit.
Note: Contact your system support person to set up the e‑mail server.

Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, the network, and supplies.
To view reports from a network printer:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can:

Restoring factory default settings
If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:

Administrative support

> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit

221

Clearing jams

222

Clearing jams
By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly, you can avoid most jams. If jams occur, follow the steps outlined
in this chapter.
Note: If Jam Recovery is set to On, then the printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed. If Jam Recovery is set
to Auto, then the printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available.

Avoiding jams
Paper tray recommendations
•
•
•
•
•

Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray.
Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.
Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly
against the paper or envelopes.

• Push the tray in firmly after loading paper.

Paper recommendations
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex and straighten paper before loading it.

•
•
•
•

Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam numbers and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears. The following illustration and table list the paper
jams that can occur and the location of each jam. Open doors and covers, and remove trays to access jam locations.

Clearing jams

223

2
4

5
1
6
8

Jam
number

Jam location

200, 241

In the standard
250‑sheet tray and
manual feeder (Tray 1)

1 Open the front door. Inspect the area behind the front door, and then

any jams.
3 Close the front door.

201

Under the fuser

202

In the fuser

230

In the duplex

235

In the duplex

Instructions

remove any jams.

2 Open the fuser cover. Inspect the area under the cover, and then remove

4 Pull Tray 1 out. Inspect the tray area, and then remove any jams.
5 Verify that the paper is loaded correctly.
6 Reinsert Tray 1.

Note: This jam number
indicates that the
paper being used for a
duplex print job is not
supported.
6

242

In the 650‑sheet tray

1 Pull the 650-sheet tray out, and then remove any jams.
2 Reinsert the tray.

243

In the 550‑sheet duo
tray

1 Pull the 550-sheet tray out, and then remove any jams.
2 Reinsert the tray.

Note: This jam number
appears only in
C546dtn printer
models.
8

250

In the multipurpose
feeder

1 Press the latch to the left to release the multipurpose feeder.
2 Inspect the multipurpose feeder, and then remove any jams.
3 Close the multipurpose feeder.
Note: You may need to open the 650‑sheet duo tray to remove jammed
pages behind the multipurpose feeder.

290–294

In the ADF

Open the ADF cover, and then remove the jam.

Clearing jams

200 paper jam
1 Grasp the handle, and pull the standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) and manual feeder out.

2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Insert the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

201 paper jam
1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

224

Clearing jams

2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Notes:

• Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
• There may be a second sheet jammed if 200.xx Paper Jam and 202.xx Paper Jam appear.
3 Close the front door.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

202 paper jam
1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

225

Clearing jams

2 Grasp the green lever, and then pull the fuser cover toward you.

3 Hold the fuser cover down, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

226

Clearing jams

227

The fuser cover closes when released.

4 Close the front door.
5 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

230 paper jam
1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.
2 Grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

235 paper jam
This jam occurs when the paper is too short for the duplex unit.

1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.
2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Load the tray with the correct paper size (A4, letter, legal, or folio).
Note: When loading, flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.

4 Insert the tray.
5 Close the front door.
6 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

Clearing jams

24x paper jam
241 paper jam
1 Grasp the handle, and then pull the standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1).

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Insert the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

242 paper jam
1 Grasp the optional 650-sheet tray handle, and then pull the tray out.

Note: The optional 650-sheet tray is supported only in select printer models.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Insert the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

228

Clearing jams

243 paper jam
1 Grasp the optional 550-sheet tray handle, and then pull the tray out.

Note: The optional 550-sheet tray is supported only in select printer models.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Insert the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

250 paper jam
1 Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder.
2 Push the lever in the multipurpose feeder to access the jammed paper.

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

229

Clearing jams

230

290–294 paper jams
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.
2 Open the ADF cover, firmly grasp any jammed paper, and then gently pull it out. Remove the pick arm assembly to
remove hard‑to‑reach jammed paper.

3 Close the ADF cover.
4 Open the scanner cover, firmly grasp any jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

5 Close the scanner cover.
6 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

Troubleshooting

231

Troubleshooting
Solving basic printer problems
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:

•
•
•
•
•
•

The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.

• All options are properly installed.
• The printer driver settings are correct.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.

Understanding the printer messages
Adjusting color
Wait for the process to complete.

Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Troubleshooting

232

Change [paper source] to [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Troubleshooting

233

Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Close front door
1 Turn the printer off, and then on.
2 Open and then fully close the front door of the printer.
Note: Make sure there are no obstructions in the front door sensor.

Error reading USB drive. Remove drive.
An unsupported USB device has been inserted. Remove the USB device, and then install a supported one.

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.

Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
The Fax Station Name has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
The Fax Station Number has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

If restarting job, replace originals that have not begun to exit the scanner
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.

• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.

Troubleshooting

234

• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

Insert Tray [x]
Fully insert the specified tray into the printer.

Load [src] with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
• Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default paper source.

• Cancel the print job.

Load [src] with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:

• Cancel the print job.

Load [src] with [size]
Try one or more of the following:

• Cancel the print job.

Load [src] with [type] [size]
Try one or more of the following:

• Cancel the print job.

Troubleshooting

235

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:

•
•
•
•

Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:

•
•
•
•

Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:

•
•
•
•

Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:

•
•
•
•

Memory full, cannot print faxes
There is not enough memory to print the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been
restarted.

No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled
The analog phone line was not detected; the fax is disabled. Connect the printer to an analog phone line, and then
touch Continue.

Troubleshooting

236

Remove packaging material, [area name]
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.

Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.

Replace all originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.

• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

Remove originals from the scanner automatic document feeder
The scanner failed to feed one or more pages through the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).

1 Remove all pages from the ADF.
Note: The message clears when the pages are removed from the ADF.

2 Flex the pages.
3 Place the pages in the ADF.
4 Adjust the ADF guides.

Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.
• Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.

Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover to clear the message.

Scan document too long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

Troubleshooting

237

Some held jobs were not restored
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.

Unsupported camera mode, unplug camera and change mode
The camera mode does not support PictBridge.
Unplug the camera, change the mode and plug the camera back into the printer.

Unsupported disk
An unsupported disk has been inserted. Remove the unsupported disk, and then install a supported one.

30.xx [Color] cartridge missing
Try one or more of the following:

• Remove and reinstall the specified toner or print cartridge. For instructions on removing a toner or print cartridge,
touch More information.

• Install a new toner or print cartridge, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

30.xx Missing [color] cartridge and/or [color] imaging kit
Try one or more of the following:

• Remove and reinstall the specified toner or print cartridge, or imaging kit. For instructions on removing a cartridge
or imaging kit, touch More information.

• Install a new cartridge or imaging kit, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

31.xx Defective [color] cartridge
The specified toner cartridge is either missing or not functioning properly. Try one or more of the following:

• Remove the specified toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
• Remove the specified toner cartridge, and then install a new one.

31.xx Defective imaging kit
The imaging kit is either missing or not functioning properly. Try one or more of the following:

• Remove the imaging kit, and then reinstall it.
• Remove the imaging kit, and then install a new one.

32.xx Replace unsupported [color] cartridge
Remove the unsupported toner or print cartridge, and then install a supported one.

Troubleshooting

238

34 Incorrect paper size, open [src]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray.
• Confirm that the wheel on tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray. Make sure this size is the size you are
trying to print.

•
•
•
•

Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
Check length and width guides of the tray and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
Make sure the Print Properties or Print dialog settings have the correct paper size and type.
Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the paper
is large enough for the data being printed.

• Cancel the print job.

35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the
menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.

• Install additional memory.

37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Touch Continue to clear the message.

37 Insufficient memory to collate job
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.

38 Memory full
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message.
• Install additional printer memory.

39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.

Troubleshooting

239

• Install additional printer memory.

51 Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.

52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.

• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.

53 Unformatted flash detected
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.

54 Standard network software error
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.

54 Network [x] software error
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer.

56 Standard USB port disabled
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.

Troubleshooting

240

57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored
Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs. Possible changes include:

•
•
•
•

The printer firmware has been updated.
Paper input options needed for the print job were removed.
The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port.
The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.

Touch Continue to clear the message.

58 Too many flash options installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

58 Too many trays attached
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

59 Incompatible tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:

• Remove the specified tray.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray.

61 Remove defective disk
Try one or more of the following:

• Remove the defective printer hard disk.
• Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.

Troubleshooting

62 Disk full
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.

63 Unformatted disk
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Format the printer hard disk.
If the error message remains, the hard disk may be defective and require replacing.

80 Routine maintenance
The printer needs to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

82.xx Replace waste toner bottle
1 Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.

2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

82.xx Waste toner bottle missing
Reinsert the waste toner bottle into the printer.

82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full
Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately.

1 Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.

2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low
Replace the specified toner cartridge.

1 Touch More Information from the printer control panel for instructions on replacing a print cartridge.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

241

Troubleshooting

242

88.xx [color] cartridge low
1 Order a replacement toner cartridge immediately.
2 Remove the specified cartridge.
3 Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute the toner.
4 Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the cartridge.

88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low
1 Order a replacement toner cartridge.
2 Remove the specified cartridge.
3 Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute the toner.
4 Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the cartridge.

840.01 Scanner disabled by admin
Print without the scanner or contact your system support person.

840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.
The printer identified a problem with the scanner and automatically disabled it. Try one or more of the following:

1 Remove all pages from the ADF.
2 Turn the printer off.
3 Wait for 15 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
Note: If turning the printer off and then on again does not clear the message, then touch Continue with scanner
disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.

4 Place the document in the ADF, and then adjust the paper guides.
5 From the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
6 Change the copy settings as needed.
7 Touch Copy It.

290–294 ADF scanning jams
The scanner failed to feed one or more pages through the ADF.

1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.
Note: The message clears when the pages are removed from the ADF.

2 Do not fold or crease original documents. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Troubleshooting

3 Load the original documents in the ADF.
4 Adjust the ADF guides.
5 Touch Continue, jam cleared.

Solving printing problems
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts.

1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2 Click the printer icon > Advanced > Print as image > OK > OK.

Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
If Performing Self Test and Ready do not appear, turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.

Error message about reading USB drive appears
Make sure the flash drive is supported.

Print jobs do not print
Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER
From the printer control panel, check the status. If necessary, follow the recovery instructions.

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT
Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job.

CHECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT
Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply.

CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL
Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin.

CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.

243

Troubleshooting

244

MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED
• Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
• If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port, then make sure you are running a supported
operating system and using a compatible printer software.

MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY
• Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
• Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected,
then check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support
person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.
The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB, SERIAL, OR ETHERNET CABLE
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.

Confidential and other held jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.

• Delete the print job, and then print it again.
• For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting
all jobs except the first one.

• For Windows users, open Print Properties. From the Print and Hold dialog, select the "Keep duplicate documents"
check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number.

• For Macintosh users, save each print job, naming each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the
printer.

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.

Troubleshooting

245

Print job takes longer than expected
Try one or more of the following:

REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print
job.

TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off >

CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS
When using Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode settings, you may notice a reduction in performance.

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the paper type and paper size settings.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.

Incorrect or strange characters print
• The print job may not have terminated properly. Turn the printer off and back on.
• Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hex appears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace
mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.

Tray linking does not work
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
Note: The paper trays, manual feeder, and multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You must
set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.

LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER
• Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
• Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.

Troubleshooting

246

USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS
• Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
• If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Large jobs do not collate
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON
From the printer control panel Finishing menu, Print Properties, or the Print dialog, set Collate to On.
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.

REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the job.

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY
Add printer memory.

Unexpected page breaks occur
INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts

2 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears.
3 Touch Submit.

Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.

CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.

Troubleshooting

Scanner unit does not close
Make sure there are no obstructions:

1 Lift the scanner unit.
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
3 Lower the scanner unit.

Poor copy quality
These are some examples of poor copy quality:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Blank pages
Checkerboard pattern
Distorted graphics or pictures
Missing characters
Faded print
Dark print
Skewed lines
Smudges
Streaks
Unexpected characters
White lines in print

Try one or more of the following:

CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES
Check the display and clear any error messages.

REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
When the print remains faded, replace the toner or print cartridge.

CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS
The scanner glass may be dirty. Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water.
For more information, see “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 197.

ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY
Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus.

MAKE SURE THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT IS SATISFACTORY
Check the quality of the original document.

247

Troubleshooting

248

PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE COPY SETTINGS
When patterns (moiré) appear in the output:

• On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being
scanned.

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > lower the Sharpness setting

• On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.
When the text is light or disappearing:

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Content > Text >

> select the appropriate source for the original document being copied >

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > increase the current setting

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal, and then reduce the current setting

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Contrast > increase the current setting

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting
When the output appears washed out or overexposed:

• On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being
scanned.

• From the Copy screen, adjust the Darkness setting.
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal > reduce the current setting

Partial document or photo copies
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Troubleshooting

249

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.

Solving scanner problems
Checking an unresponsive scanner
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:

• The printer is turned on.
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.

•
•
•
•

Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem
with the scanner.

Scan was not successful
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.

AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM
Turn off and then restart the computer.

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING
Close all programs not being used.

Troubleshooting

250

THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH
Select a lower scan resolution.

Poor scanned image quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.

THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on page 197.

ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.

CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Partial document or photo scans
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

Troubleshooting

251

Cannot scan from a computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.

CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.

CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.

Solving fax problems
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e‑mail. To set up fax and e‑mail, follow these steps:
Note: Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network, make sure the fax cables are connected.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes > Submit

2 Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on.
3 From the printer control panel, touch your language.
4 Touch your country or region, and then touch Continue.
5 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
6 Touch Fax and E‑mail to clear the icons, and then touch Continue.
Note: You can use these same steps to disable fax and e‑mail.

Caller ID is not shown
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to
determine which pattern or switch setting to use.

Troubleshooting

252

Cannot send or receive a fax
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.

CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.

CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:

• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine

CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.

REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services
can be used.

• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface
port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN
provider.

• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information,
contact your DSL provider.

• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX.
If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.

CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE
• Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.
• If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending
a fax.

• If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.

Troubleshooting

253

TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.

CHECK FOR JAMS
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Ready appears.

TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.

VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail
and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.

THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL
1 Dial the fax number.
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.

Can send but not receive faxes
Try one or more of the following:

LOAD PAPER
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.

CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers. If you have extension
phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep
the Ring Delay setting at 4.

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

Troubleshooting

254

REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the toner or print cartridge.

Can receive but not send faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS IN FAX MODE
From the printer control panel, press the Fax button to put the printer in Fax mode.

MAKE SURE THE DOCUMENT IS LOADED PROPERLY
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left
corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY
• Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
• As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.

Received fax has poor print quality
Try one or more of the following:

RESEND THE DOCUMENT
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:

• Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
• Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
• Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.

REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the prints appear faded, replace the cartridge.

MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.

Troubleshooting

255

3 In the Max Speed box, click one of the following:
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600

4 Click Submit.

Solving home screen application problems
An application error has occurred
CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS
1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:

• View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings or Configuration.
3 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > System tab > Log.
4 From the Filter menu, select an application status.
5 From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.

MAKE SURE THE FILE NAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE
Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user.
To help prevent errors, make sure either “Append time stamp” or “Overwrite existing file” is selected in the
destination configuration settings.

ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS
In the destination configuration settings, lower the scan settings. For example, lower the scan resolution, disable
Color, or change the Content type to Text.

CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If you still cannot isolate the problem, then contact customer support.

Troubleshooting

256

Solving option problems
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
Try one or more of the following:

RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.

CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER
1 Turn the printer off using the power switch.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.

MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not
listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or
go to www.lexmark.com to view the option instruction sheet.

MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED
From the computer you are printing from, select the option.
For more information, see “Adding available options in the print driver” on page 37.

Drawers
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1 Open the paper tray.
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3 Make sure paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.
5 Close the door.

RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off. Wait 10 seconds. Turn the printer back on.

Troubleshooting

257

Multipurpose feeder
CHECK THE MULTIPURPOSE FEEDER
Make sure the 650‑sheet duo drawer (multipurpose feeder) is installed properly.

CLEAR ANY JAMS
Clear any jams in the multipurpose feeder.

CHECK THE POWER CORD CONNECTION
Make sure:

• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
• The outlet has power.

CHECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty
media guidelines.

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct position for the size loaded.

CHECK FOR SERVICE MESSAGES
If a service message appears, turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on. If the
error recurs, call for service.

Memory card
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.

Solving paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty
media guidelines.

Troubleshooting

258

MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the
multipurpose feeder.

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
CHECK THE PAPER PATH
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.

Jammed pages are not reprinted
TURN ON JAM RECOVERY
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery

2 Touch the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.
3 Touch Submit.

Solving print quality problems
The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems. If these suggestions still do not
correct the problem, contact Customer Support. You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement.

Printer is printing blank pages

Try one or more of the following:

Troubleshooting

259

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the cartridge.

MAKE SURE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four
cartridges:

1 Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.

2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

Characters have jagged or uneven edges

If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the
software program.

Clipped images
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE GUIDES
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.

Troubleshooting

Dark lines appear on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
MAKE SURE THE IMAGING KIT IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
When 31.xx Defective imaging kit appears, replace the imaging kit.

Gray background

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:

• From the printer control panel, change the setting from the Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.

Incorrect margins

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

260

Troubleshooting

261

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line

THE IMAGING KIT MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the imaging kit.
Note: The printer has two types of imaging kits: a black and color imaging kit, and a black imaging kit. The black
and color imaging kit contains cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The black imaging kit contains black only.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.

Paper curl
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.

LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

Troubleshooting

262

Print irregularities

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.

CHECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.

THE FUSER MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the fuser.

)

Repeating defects

REPLACE THE DEVELOPER UNIT
Replace the developer unit if the defects occur in every 43.9 mm (1.7 in.) of the page.

Troubleshooting

263

REPLACE THE IMAGING KIT
Replace the imaging kit if print defects occur in the following instances:

• in every 34.6 mm (1.4 in.) of the page
• in every 94.2 mm (3.71 in.) of the page
Note: The printer has two types of imaging kits: a black and color imaging kit, and a black imaging kit. The black
and color imaging kit contains cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The black imaging kit contains black only.

Skewed print
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

CHECK THE PAPER
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.

Print is too light

Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting may be too light, the Brightness setting may be too light, or the Contrast setting may be
too low.

• Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties
• For Macintosh users:
1 Choose File > Print.
2 From the Orientation pictures drop‑down menu, choose Printer Features.
3 Choose a higher value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.

LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

Troubleshooting

264

AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

• From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
• For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.

MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print
cartridge.

1 Remove the toner cartridge.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the toner cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, replace the print cartridge.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective toner cartridge.

Print is too dark

Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting may be too dark, the Brightness setting may be too dark, or the Contrast setting may be
too high.

• Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users:
1 Choose File > Print.
2 From the Orientation pictures drop‑down menu, choose Printer Features.

Troubleshooting

265

3 Choose a lower value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.

LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective toner cartridge.

Solid color or black pages appear on prints

MAKE SURE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY, ARE NOT DEFECTIVE AND NOT LOW
ON TONER

• Remove and reinstall the toner or print cartridges.
• Make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the toner or print cartridge:
1 Remove the toner or print cartridge.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the toner or print cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, replace the toner or print cartridge. For more information, see
“Replacing a toner cartridge” on page 209.

• If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

Troubleshooting

266

Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THE IMAGING KITS ARE NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the imaging kits.
Note: The printer has two types of imaging kits: a black‑and‑color imaging kit, and a black imaging kit. The
black‑and‑color imaging kit has cyan, magenta, yellow, and black developer units. The black imaging kit has a black
developer unit only.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Clean any visible toner from the paper path. If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Toner rubs off

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.

CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING
From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the
tray.

Troubleshooting

267

Toner specks

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

THE IMAGING KIT MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the imaging kit.
Note: The printer has two types of imaging kits: a black and color imaging kit, and a black imaging kit. The black
and color imaging kit contains cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The black imaging kit contains black only.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.

THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.

Transparency print quality is poor
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES
Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency:

Troubleshooting

268

Uneven print density

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Replace the black and color imaging kit.

Solving color quality problems
This section helps answer some basic color‑related questions and describes how some of the features provided in the
Quality menu can be used to solve typical color problems.

FAQ about color printing
What is RGB color?
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in
nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create
colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue
needed to produce a certain color.
What is CMYK color?
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors
observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers,
and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the
amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.
How is color specified in a document to be printed?
Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they allow
users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program Help topics.
How does the printer know what color to print?
When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The
color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information determines the
application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text
while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.
Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?
The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard
computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are
many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on how
the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color‑matching problems, see the question, “How
can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?”

Troubleshooting

269

The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?
Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red). This can be
caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these instances, adjust
the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make
subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or negative values for
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (from the Color Balance menu) will slightly increase or decrease the amount of
toner used for the chosen color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then decreasing both magenta and
yellow could potentially improve the color balance.
My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?
This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain
the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector
must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency. Make sure to print
on the recommended type of color transparencies.
What is manual color correction?
When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user‑selected color conversion tables to process
objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user‑defined color conversion will be implemented.
Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how
the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).
Notes:

• Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating
system controls the adjustment of colors.

• The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate preferred
colors for the majority of documents.
To manually apply a different color conversion table:

1 From the Quality menu, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
2 From the Quality menu, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the
affected object type.
Object type

Color conversion tables

RGB Image
RGB Text

• Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied

RGB Graphics

• sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors

to all incoming color formats.
displayed on a computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized for
printing photographs.

• Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the
colors displayed on a computer monitor. Uses only black toner to create
all levels of neutral gray.

• sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB
Display color correction. Black usage is optimized for printing business
graphics.

• Off—No color correction is implemented.

Troubleshooting

Object type
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
CMYK Graphics

270

Color conversion tables

• US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP
(Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.

• Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color
output.

• Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color
correction setting.

• Off—No color correction is implemented.
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?
From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These are also available from the Color
Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple‑page printout consisting
of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table
selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box
through the selected color conversion table.
By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The color
combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For
more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the
selected color conversion table for the particular object.
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color‑matching problem depends on the Color Correction
setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the
color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color
Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; and no color conversion is implemented.
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating
system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting
printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.
What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?
Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A detailed
Color Samples set contains a range of shades (displayed as colored boxes) that are similar to a user‑defined RGB or
CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment
box.
To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:

1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:

• View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Configuration > Color Samples > Detailed Options.
3 Select a color conversion table.
4 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.

Troubleshooting

271

5 Enter an increment value from 1–255.
Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range will appear.

6 Click Print.

Embedded Web Server does not open
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.

CHECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE WEB BROWSER
• Depending on the network settings, you may need to type “https://” instead of “http://” before the printer
IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.

• Make sure printer IP address is correct.

TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server. For
more information, contact your system support person.

Contacting customer support
When you call customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
In the U.S. or Canada, call 1‑800‑539‑6275. For other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.

Notices

272

Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark X548de and X548dte
Machine type:
7525
Model(s):
630, 636

Edition notice
October 2014
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2014 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

Notices

273

Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in
the United States and/or other countries.
ScanBack is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus

The Monotype Corporation plc

Antique Olive

Monsieur Marcel OLIVE

Apple-Chancery

Apple Computer, Inc.

Arial

The Monotype Corporation plc

CG Times

Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation

Chicago

Apple Computer, Inc.

Clarendon

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Eurostile

Nebiolo

Geneva

Apple Computer, Inc.

GillSans

The Monotype Corporation plc

Helvetica

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Hoefler

Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry

ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman

International Typeface Corporation

ITC Mona Lisa

International Typeface Corporation

ITC Zapf Chancery

International Typeface Corporation

Joanna

The Monotype Corporation plc

Marigold

Arthur Baker

Monaco

Apple Computer, Inc.

New York

Apple Computer, Inc.

Oxford

Arthur Baker

Palatino

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Stempel Garamond

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Taffy

Agfa Corporation

Times New Roman

The Monotype Corporation plc

Notices

Univers

274

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.

Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M04-001, FCC ID: IYLLEXM04001; IC:2376A-M04001

Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD.

Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing

Scanning

Copying

Ready

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Notices

275

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.

India E-Waste notice
This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of lead,
mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations
exceeding 0.1％ by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in Schedule II of the Rules.

Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.

Battery notice
This product contains Perchlorate material. Special handling may apply. For more information, go to
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/.

Static sensitivity notice

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.

Notices

276

ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.

Temperature information
Ambient temperature

15.6 to 32.2° C (60 to 90° F) and 8% to 80% RH

Shipping and storage temperature

‑40° to 43.3° C (110° F)

Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。

Notices

277

Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode

Description

Power consumption
(Watts)

Printing

The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs.

540

Copy

The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original documents. 530

Scan

The product is scanning hard‑copy documents.

Ready

The product is waiting for a print job.

Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode.

Off

0.2

The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off.

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes):

20 minutes

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Notices

278

Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.

European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and
2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, and on the restrictions of
use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.

Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements
of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.

Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is

Notices

279

provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.

Notices

280

Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:

• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and

• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.

• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

Notices

281

Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives
metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines
in Switzerland.

Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 80D1877)
devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé pour toute
installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.

Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die
Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte
vorhanden sind.

Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee che
ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le
linee analogiche in Svizzera.

Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.

Notices

282

To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.

Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.

Notice to users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits,
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.

Notices

283

This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT

Česky

Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.

Dansk

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Deutsch

Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.

Ελληνική

ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.

English

Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Español

Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Eesti

Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.

Suomi

Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.

Français

Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Magyar

Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

Notices

284

Íslenska

Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.

Italiano

Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latviski

Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.

Lietuvių

Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.

Malti

Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.

Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Polski

Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Português

A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.

Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska

Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the countryspecific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).

Notices

285

If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.

Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle

Notices

286

—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.

Notices

287

The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.

Index

288

Index
Numerics
200 paper jam 224
201 paper jam 224
202 paper jam 225
230 paper jam 227
235 paper jam 227
241 paper jam 228
242 paper jam 228
243 paper jam 228
250 paper jam 229
250‑sheet tray (standard)
loading 44
290.30 Scanner Static Jam - Paper
Stop 236
290–294 ADF scanning jams 242
290–294 paper jams 230
30.xx [Color] cartridge missing 237
30.xx Missing [color] cartridge
and/or [color] imaging kit 237
31.xx Defective [color]
cartridge 237
31.xx Defective imaging kit 237
32.xx Replace unsupported [color]
cartridge 237
34 Incorrect paper size, open
[src] 238
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 238
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 238
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 238
38 Memory full 238
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 238
51 Defective flash detected 239
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 239
53 Unformatted flash detected 239
54 Network [x] software error 239
54 Standard network software
error 239
550‑sheet tray
installing 33
550‑sheet tray (optional)
loading 44
56 Standard USB port disabled 239

57 Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored 240
58 Too many flash options
installed 240
58 Too many trays attached 240
59 Incompatible tray [x] 240
61 Remove defective disk 240
62 Disk full 241
63 Unformatted disk 241
650‑sheet duo drawer
installing 33
loading 47
650‑sheet duo drawer (optional)
loading 44
80 Routine maintenance 241
82.xx Replace waste toner
bottle 241
82.xx Waste toner bottle
missing 241
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly
full 241
840.01 Scanner disabled by
admin 242
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. 242
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically
low 241
88.xx [color] cartridge low 242
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly
low 242

A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 21
Active NIC menu 131
adding a date and time stamp 77
adding hardware options
print driver 37
ADF
copying using 70
Adjusting color 231
adjusting copy quality 74
adjusting Sleep mode 41
adjusting toner darkness 60
administrator settings
Embedded Web Server 219

advanced options
copying 80
e‑mailing 87
faxing 108
FTP 117
AppleTalk menu 135
assigning a custom paper type
name 52
attaching cables 35
avoiding jams 57
avoiding paper jams 222

B
black‑and‑white copying 72
blank pages 258
blocking junk faxes 106
buttons, printer control panel 14
buttons, touch screen
using 17

C
cables
Ethernet 35
USB 35
calling customer support 271
canceling a print job
from a computer 69
from the printer control panel 69
canceling an e-mail 84
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 271
card stock
loading 48
tips on using 63
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 232
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 232
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 231
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load [orientation] 231
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] 232
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] [paper type] 232

Index

Change [paper source] to [paper
size] [paper type] load
[orientation] 233
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 232
changing output file type
e‑mailing 84
checking an unresponsive
printer 231
checking an unresponsive
scanner 249
checking status of supplies 198
checking the printer status
using the Embedded Web
Server 219
checking the status of supplies 198
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 219
checking virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 219
cleaning
exterior of the printer 197
scanner glass 197
Close front door 233
collating copies 75
confidential print jobs 66
printing from a Macintosh
computer 67
printing from Windows 67
Confidential Print menu 140
configurations
printer 12
configuring e‑mail settings 81
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 92
connecting the printer to
answering machine 92
computer modem 99
regional adapters 95
telephone 92
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 41
conserving supplies 39
Eco‑Mode 40
Quiet Mode 40
Sleep Mode 41
conserving supplies 39
contacting customer support 271
control panel, printer 14

289

copy quality
adjusting 74
copy screen
options 78, 79
Copy Settings menu 150
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 246
partial document or photo
copies 248
poor copy quality 247
poor scanned image quality 250
scanner unit does not close 247
copying
adding a date and time stamp 77
adding an overlay message 77
adjusting quality 74
advanced options 80
canceling a copy job 77, 78
collating copies 75
custom job (job build) 76
different paper sizes 73
enlarging 74
in black‑and‑white 72
multiple pages on one sheet 76
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 73
on letterhead 71
on transparencies 71
photos 71
placing separator sheets between
copies 75
quick copy 70
reducing 74
selecting a tray 72
to a different size 72
using the ADF 70
using the scanner glass
(flatbed) 71
copying different paper sizes 73
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 76
copying on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 73
copying on letterhead 71
copying on transparencies 71
copying photos 71
creating a fax destination shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 102
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 111

creating profiles
using the ScanBack Utility 114
custom name
configuring 53
Custom Names menu 128
custom paper type name
creating 52
Custom Scan Sizes menu 129
Custom Type [x]
changing name 52
changing paper type 53
Custom Types menu 128

D
date and time, fax
setting 101
daylight savings time, faxing 102
Default Source menu 120
different paper sizes, copying 73
directory list
printing 68
disk wiping 194
display troubleshooting
display is blank 243
display shows only diamonds 243
display, printer control panel 14
adjusting brightness 41
disposing of printer hard disk 193
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 92
documents, printing
from Macintosh 60
from Windows 60
duplexing 73

E
Eco‑Mode setting 40
Edit Security Setups menu 138
Embedded Web Server
accessing 21, 219
administrator settings 219
checking printer status 219
checking supplies 198
creating a fax destination
shortcut 102
creating an FTP shortcut 111
creating e‑mail shortcuts 82
functions 219
initial fax setup 89
networking settings 219
problem accessing 271

Index

setting up e‑mail alerts 220
using 219
Embedded Web Server — Security:
Administrator's Guide
where to find 219
emission notices 274, 278, 281, 282
encrypting the printer hard
disk 195
enlarging a copy 74
envelopes
loading 48, 50
tips 63
environmental settings
brightness, adjusting 41
conserving supplies 39
Eco‑Mode 40
Quiet Mode 40
Sleep Mode 41
Erase Temporary Data Files
menu 140
erasing hard disk memory 194
erasing non‑volatile memory 194
erasing volatile memory 194
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 233
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 38
Ethernet port 35
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 38
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 24
exporting a configuration using the
Embedded Web Server 24
EXT port
fax 35
exterior of the printer
cleaning 197
e‑mail
canceling 84
e‑mail alert
different paper is needed 220
notice of low supply level 220
notice of paper jam 220
e‑mail function
setting up 81
e‑mail options
Send As 86
e‑mail screen
advanced options 86

290

options 85, 86
E‑mail Settings menu 163
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 82
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 83
using the address book 83
using the touch screen 83
e‑mailing
adding message line 84
adding subject line 84
advanced options 87
configuring e‑mail settings 81
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 82
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 82
setting up e‑mail function 81
using a shortcut number 83
using the address book 83
using the touch screen 83

F
factory defaults
restoring 220
FAQ about color printing 268
fax
sending 103
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 251
fax and e‑mail functions are not set
up 251
fax connection
connecting the printer to the wall
jack 91
connecting to a DSL line 91
connecting to a PBX or ISDN 91
fax connections
answering machine 92
computer modem 99
regional adapters 95
telephone 92
fax log
viewing 106
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 154
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 162
fax options
resolution 107
fax ports 35

fax screen
advanced options 108
options 107, 108
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system administrator. 233
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system administrator. 233
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 251
can receive but not send
faxes 254
can send but not receive
faxes 253
cannot send or receive a fax 252
received fax has poor print
quality 254
faxing
advanced options 108
blocking junk faxes 106
canceling a fax job 106, 107
changing resolution 105
choosing a fax connection 90
configuring the printer to observe
daylight saving time 102
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 102
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 103
distinctive ring service 92
fax setup 89
forwarding faxes 109
holding faxes 109
making a fax lighter or darker 105
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 105
sending using the touch
screen 103
setting the date and time 101
setting the fax number or station
number 101
setting the outgoing fax name or
station name 101
viewing a fax log 106
FCC notices 274, 278, 281
finding more information about the
printer 9
finding printer IP address 21
Finishing menu 180
flash drive
printing from 61
Flash Drive menu 173

Index

flash drives
supported file types 62
flash memory card
installing 29
font card
installing 29
font sample list
printing 68
Forms and Favorites
setting up 22
forwarding faxes 109
FTP
advanced options 117
scanning using address book 113
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 112
FTP screen
options 115
FTP Settings menu 169

G
General Settings menu 143
Green settings
Eco‑Mode 40
Quiet Mode 40
guidelines
card stock 63
envelopes 63
letterhead 64
transparencies 66

H
hardware options, adding
print driver 37
held jobs 66
printing from a Macintosh
computer 67
printing from Windows 67
Help menu 191
hiding icons on the home screen 21
holding faxes 109
home screen
hiding icons 21
showing icons 21
home screen buttons and icons
description 16
HTML menu 189

291

I
If restarting job, replace originals
that have not begun to exit the
scanner 233
Image menu 190
imaging kits
ordering 199
replacing 203
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 24
importing a configuration using the
Embedded Web Server 24
initial fax setup 89
using the Embedded Web
Server 89
Insert Tray [x] 234
installing options
order of installation 33
installing printer 37
IP address, printer
finding 21
IPv6 menu 134

J
jams
avoiding 222
locating doors and trays 222
locations 222
numbers 222
jams, clearing
200 paper jam 224
201 paper jam 224
202 paper jam 225
230 paper jam 227
235 paper jam 227
241 paper jam 228
242 paper jam 228
243 paper jam 228
250 paper jam 229
290–294 paper jams 230
Job Accounting menu 183

L
labels, paper
tips 65
letterhead
copying on 71
loading, manual feeder 64
loading, trays 64
tips on using 64

light, indicator 14
LINE port
fax 35
linking trays 52
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 235
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 235
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 235
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 235
loading
250‑sheet tray (standard) 44
550‑sheet tray (optional) 44
650‑sheet duo drawer 47
650‑sheet duo drawer
(optional) 44
card stock 48
envelopes 48, 50
letterhead in manual feeder 64
letterhead in trays 64
manual feeder 50
multipurpose feeder 48
transparencies 48
lock, security 25

M
making copies using paper from
selected tray 72
manual feeder
loading 50
memory
types installed on printer 193
memory card
installing 26
troubleshooting 257
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 235
menu settings page
printing 37
menus
Active NIC 131
AppleTalk 135
Confidential Print 140
Copy Settings 150
Custom Names 128
Custom Scan Sizes 129
Custom Types 128
Default Source 120
Edit Security Setups 138
Erase Temporary Data Files 140

Index

E‑mail Settings 163
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 154
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 162
Finishing 180
Flash Drive 173
FTP Settings 169
General Settings 143
Help 191
HTML 189
Image 190
IPv6 134
Job Accounting 183
list of 118
Miscellaneous Security
Settings 139
Network [x] 131
Network Card 133
OCR Settings 178
Paper Loading 127
Paper Size/Type 120
Paper Texture 123
Paper Weight 125
PCL Emul 187
PDF 186
PictBridge 191
PostScript 186
Quality 182
Reports 130, 132
Security Audit Log 141
Set Date/Time 142
Settings 178
SMTP Setup menu 137
Standard Network 131
Standard USB 136
Substitute Size 123
Supplies 119
TCP/IP 133
Universal Setup 129
Utilities 185
XPS 186
Miscellaneous Security Settings
menu 139
mobile device
printing from 61
moving the printer 217, 218
multipurpose feeder
loading 48
My MFP
setting up 23

N
Network [x] menu 131

292

Network Card menu 133
network settings
Embedded Web Server 219
network setup page
printing 37
Networking Guide
where to find 219
No analog phone line connected to
modem, fax is disabled 235
noise emission levels 274
non‑volatile memory 193
erasing 194
notices 273, 274, 275, 276, 277,
278, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283

O
OCR Settings menu 178
options
550‑sheet tray 33
650‑sheet duo drawer 33
flash memory card 29
font card 29
memory card 26
options, touch‑screen
copy 78, 79
e‑mail 85, 86
fax 107, 108
FTP 115
scan 116
scan to computer 115, 116, 117
ordering
imaging kits 199
toner cartridges 199
waste toner bottle 199
output file type
changing 84
scan image 115

P
paper
characteristics 54
different sizes, copying 73
letterhead 56
preprinted forms 56
recycled 55
saving 76
selecting 55
storing 57
unacceptable 55
Universal size setting 44
using recycled 39

paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 258
paper jams
avoiding 222
paper jams, clearing
200 paper jam 224
201 paper jam 224
202 paper jam 225
230 paper jam 227
235 paper jam 227
241 paper jam 228
242 paper jam 228
243 paper jam 228
250 paper jam 229
290–294 paper jams 230
Paper Loading menu 127
paper size
setting 44
Paper Size/Type menu 120
paper sizes
supported by the printer 57
Paper Texture menu 123
paper type
setting 44
paper types
supported by printer 59
where to load 59
Paper Weight menu 125
paper weights
supported by printer 59
PCL Emul menu 187
PDF menu 186
photos
copying 71
PictBridge menu 191
PictBridge‑enabled printing
photos 68
placing separator sheets between
copies 75
PostScript menu 186
power cord socket 35
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 38
print driver
hardware options, adding 37
print job
canceling, from computer 69
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 197
replacing developer unit 211
replacing imaging kits 203

Index

replacing the waste toner
bottle 200
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 258
characters have jagged edges 259
clipped images 259
dark lines 260
gray background 260
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line 261
poor transparency quality 267
print irregularities 262
print is too dark 264
print is too light 263
repeating defects 262
skewed print 263
solid color or black pages appear
on prints 265
toner fog or background
shading 266
toner rubs off 266
toner specks 267
uneven print density 268
print troubleshooting
error reading flash drive 243
held jobs do not print 244
incorrect margins 260
incorrect or strange characters
print 245
jammed pages are not
reprinted 258
job prints from wrong tray 245
job prints on wrong paper 245
jobs do not print 243
Large jobs do not collate 246
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 243
paper curl 261
paper frequently jams 257
print job takes longer than
expected 245
tray linking does not work 245
unexpected page breaks
occur 246
printer 37
configurations 12
minimum clearances 10
models 12
moving 217, 218
selecting a location 10
shipping 218

293

printer control panel 14
adjusting brightness 41
factory defaults, restoring 220
printer fax EXT port 35
printer fax LINE port 35
printer hard disk
disposing of 193
encrypting 195
wiping 194
printer hard disk encryption 195
printer hard disk memory
erasing 194
printer information
where to find 9
printer IP address
finding 21
printer messages
290.30 Scanner Static Jam - Paper
Stop 236
290–294 ADF scanning jams 242
30.xx [Color] cartridge
missing 237
30.xx Missing [color] cartridge
and/or [color] imaging kit 237
31.xx Defective [color]
cartridge 237
31.xx Defective imaging kit 237
32.xx Replace unsupported [color]
cartridge 237
34 Incorrect paper size, open
[src] 238
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 238
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 238
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 238
38 Memory full 238
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 238
51 Defective flash detected 239
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 239
53 Unformatted flash
detected 239
54 Network [x] software error 239
54 Standard network software
error 239
56 Standard USB port
disabled 239
57 Configuration change, some
held jobs were not restored 240

58 Too many flash options
installed 240
58 Too many trays attached 240
59 Incompatible tray [x] 240
61 Remove defective disk 240
62 Disk full 241
63 Unformatted disk 241
80 Routine maintenance 241
82 Replace waste toner
bottle 200
82.xx Replace waste toner
bottle 241
82.xx Waste toner bottle
missing 241
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly
full 241
840.01 Scanner disabled by
admin 242
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. 242
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically
low 209, 241
88.xx [color] cartridge low 242
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly
low 242
Adjusting color 231
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 232
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 232
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 231
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load
[orientation] 231
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] 232
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] [paper type] 232
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] [paper type] load
[orientation] 233
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 232
Close front door 233
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 233
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 233

Index

Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 233
If restarting job, replace originals
that have not begun to exit the
scanner 233
Insert Tray [x] 234
Load [src] with [custom
string] 234
Load [src] with [custom type
name] 234
Load [src] with [size] 234
Load [src] with [type] [size] 234
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 235
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 235
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 235
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 235
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 235
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled 235
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 236
Remove paper from standard
output bin 236
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 236
Replace Color Imaging Kit 203
Restore held jobs? 236
Scan document too long 236
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 236
Some held jobs were not
restored 237
Unsupported camera mode,
unplug camera and change
mode 237
Unsupported disk 237
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 233
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 233
printer options troubleshooting
drawers 256
memory card 257
multipurpose feeder 257
option does not work 256
printer problems, solving basic 231

294

printer status
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 219
printing
canceling, from the printer control
panel 69
directory list 68
font sample list 68
from a mobile device 61
from flash drive 61
from Macintosh 60
from Windows 60
menu settings page 37
network setup page 37
photos 68
printing a directory list 68
printing a document 60
printing a font sample list 68
printing a menu settings page 37
printing a network setup page 37
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from a Macintosh computer 67
from Windows 67
printing from a flash drive 61
printing from a mobile device 61
publications
where to find 9

Q
Quality menu 182

R
recycled paper
using 39, 55
recycling
Lexmark packaging 42
Lexmark products 42
toner cartridges 42
reducing a copy 74
reducing printer noise 40
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 23
Remove originals from the scanner
automatic document feeder 236
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 236
Remove paper from standard
output bin 236

repeat print jobs 66
printing from a Macintosh
computer 67
printing from Windows 67
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 236
reports
viewing 220
Reports menu 130, 132
reserve print jobs 66
printing from a Macintosh
computer 67
printing from Windows 67
resolution, fax
changing 105
Restore held jobs? 236
restoring factory default
settings 220

S
safety information 7, 8
saving paper 76
Scan document too long 236
scan image
output file type 115
scan options
Send As 115
scan screen
options 116
scan to computer
options 116, 117
original size 115
paper orientation, setting 116
Scan to Network
setting up 22
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 251
partial document or photo
scans 250
scan was not successful 249
scanner unit does not close 247
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 249
ScanBack Utility
using 114
scanner
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) 13
functions 12
scanner glass 13
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 236

Index

scanner glass
cleaning 197
scanner glass (flatbed)
copying using 71
scanning
from a flash drive 114
to a computer 113
to an FTP address 112
to an FTP, using address book 113
scanning to a computer 113
scanning to a flash drive 114
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 111
using shortcut numbers 112
using the address book 113
using the touch screen 112
Security Audit Log menu 141
security lock 25
security lock port 35
selecting paper 55
Send As
e‑mail options 86
scan options 115
sending a fax 103
sending a fax using shortcuts 104
sending a fax using the touch
screen 103
sending fax
using shortcuts 104
using the address book 104
sending fax at a scheduled
time 105
sending fax using the address
book 104
Set Date/Time menu 142
setting
TCP/IP address 133
setting the fax number or station
number 101
setting the outgoing fax name or
station name 101
setting the paper size 44
setting the paper type 44
setting the Universal paper size 44
setting up e‑mail alerts
using the Embedded Web
Server 220
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 251
Settings menu 178
shipping the printer 218

295

shortcuts, creating
e‑mail 82
fax destination 102, 103
FTP address 112
FTP destination 111
showing icons on the home
screen 21
Sleep Mode
adjusting 41
SMTP Setup menu 137
Some held jobs were not
restored 237
Standard Network menu 131
standard tray
loading 44
Standard USB menu 136
statement of volatility 193
status of supplies
checking 198
storing
paper 57
supplies 198
storing print jobs 66
subject and message information
adding to e‑mail 84
Substitute Size menu 123
supplies
checking status 198
checking, from printer control
panel 198
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 198, 219
conserving 39
storing 198
using recycled paper 39
Supplies menu 119
supplies, ordering
imaging kits 199
toner cartridges 199
waste toner bottle 199
supported flash drives 62

T
TCP/IP menu 133
telecommunication
notices 278, 279, 280, 281
tips
labels, paper 65
toner cartridges
ordering 199
recycling 42
replacing 209

toner darkness
adjusting 60
touch screen
buttons 17
transparencies
copying on 71
loading 48
tips on using 66
tray linking
assigning a custom paper type
name 52
tray unlinking
assigning a custom paper type
name 52
trays
linking 52
unlinking 52
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 255
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 271
checking an unresponsive
printer 231
checking an unresponsive
scanner 249
contacting customer support 271
FAQ about color printing 268
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 251
Scan to Network 255
solving basic printer
problems 231
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 246
partial document or photo
copies 248
poor copy quality 247
poor scanned image quality 250
scanner unit does not close 247
troubleshooting, display
display is blank 243
display shows only diamonds 243
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 251
can receive but not send
faxes 254
can send but not receive
faxes 253
cannot send or receive a fax 252
received fax has poor print
quality 254

Index

troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 258
troubleshooting, print
error reading flash drive 243
held jobs do not print 244
incorrect margins 260
incorrect or strange characters
print 245
jammed pages are not
reprinted 258
job prints from wrong tray 245
job prints on wrong paper 245
jobs do not print 243
Large jobs do not collate 246
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 243
paper curl 261
paper frequently jams 257
print job takes longer than
expected 245
tray linking does not work 245
unexpected page breaks
occur 246
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 258
characters have jagged edges 259
clipped images 259
dark lines 260
gray background 260
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line 261
poor transparency quality 267
print irregularities 262
print is too dark 264
print is too light 263
repeating defects 262
skewed print 263
solid color or black pages appear
on prints 265
toner fog or background
shading 266
toner rubs off 266
toner specks 267
uneven print density 268
troubleshooting, printer options
drawers 256
memory card 257
multipurpose feeder 257
option does not work 256
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 251

296

partial document or photo
scans 250
scan was not successful 249
scanner unit does not close 247
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 249

U
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 16
Universal Paper Size
setting 44
Universal Setup menu 129
unlinking trays 52
Unsupported camera mode, unplug
camera and change mode 237
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 233
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 233
USB port 35
using Eco‑Mode 40
using Quiet Mode 40
using recycled paper 39
using shortcuts
sending fax 104
using the address book 83
sending fax 104
using the Embedded Web
Server 219
using the ScanBack Utility 114
using the touch‑screen buttons 17
Utilities menu 185

V
verify print jobs 66
printing from a Macintosh
computer 67
printing from Windows 67
viewing
reports 220
viewing a fax log 106
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 219
volatile memory 193
erasing 194
volatility
statement of 193

W
waste toner bottle
ordering 199
replacing 200
wiping the printer hard disk 194
WS‑Scan
about 23

X
XPS menu 186

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Format                          : application/pdf
Description                     : X548 Series
Title                           : User's Guide
Creator                         : Lexmark International, Inc.
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.5.5 (Windows)
Keywords                        : v16012509
Creator Tool                    : AH Formatter V5.3 MR1 (5,3,2011,0610) for Windows
Modify Date                     : 2014:11:05 17:01:15-05:00
Create Date                     : 2014:11:05 17:01:15-05:00
Document ID                     : uuid:4f886c00-e57b-475e-98c5-8be1412c29f5
Instance ID                     : uuid:f0b506cd-0bb4-43df-a025-7561948d46c4
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 296
Author                          : Lexmark International, Inc.
Subject                         : X548 Series

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

User's Guide X548DE X548 User V16012509 En

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation